JP7393664B2 - pinball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a pinball game machine equipped with a game area where game balls are fired.

Conventionally, among the various pinball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine displays multiple symbols on a display area, such as a liquid crystal display, located approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot, in which you can get more prize balls than in a normal game when the combination of symbols in multiple rows stops changing in a specific manner. known as a thing. The fluctuating display of symbols in the display area is not only about multiple symbols being displayed fluctuating, but also by changing the time of the fluctuating display in a state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, as in the so-called reach screen. Performances are designed to heighten players' expectations, such as making the game longer than before. In addition, players' expectations are heightened by the use of characters in symbols and other images to give a story to the fluctuating displays, and by previewing effects that hint at high expectations for the transition to special games. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714 JP 2017-158638 Publication

In recent years, there are limits on the storage capacity of main circuit boards stipulated by regulations, and various methods have been used to reduce the amount of data. In particular, while increasing the number of symbols can expand the range of gameplay, the number of processing and data tables corresponding to each symbol increases, leading to an increase in the amount of data that overwhelms the memory of the main board. The situation was such that it was not possible to increase the amount.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress an increase in the amount of data even if the number of symbols is increased.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a pinball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a starting hole into which a game ball can enter, and a game machine that uses the ball entering the starting hole as an opportunity to provide an advantageous game for the player compared to a normal game. a win/fail judgment means for executing a win/fail judgment to determine whether or not to move to a special game that is a state; a display device for variably displaying symbols to show the result of the win/fail decision; and a display device for causing the display device to variably display the symbols. a display control means, a symbol determining means that determines the stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination, and a symbol determining means that selects by lottery one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in which a variation display process of the symbol is determined; Variation pattern determining means holds a plurality of variation pattern selection criteria in which a correspondence relationship between variation patterns and lottery values is determined as selection criteria to be referred to in the selection criteria, and the result of the judgment of validity indicates that transition to the special game is possible. , a special game control means that executes a special game when the fluctuating display of symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner, and the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state. a specific game control means that controls transition to a specific game state, a performance display device that displays performance content according to the result of a win/fail determination, and a performance determination unit that determines performance content to be displayed on the performance display device. and performance control means for displaying performance content on a performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means. The variation pattern determining means may refer to the normal variation pattern selection criteria as the variation pattern selection criteria during the specific state period after the end of the special game, or may refer to the special variation pattern selection criteria that is different from the normal variation pattern selection criteria. , the fluctuation pattern determining means stores a specific timing table in which a specific timing, which is the timing of referring to the special fluctuation pattern selection criteria in a specific state period, is determined for each stop symbol; Refer to the timing table, and if the symbol fluctuation is at a specific timing that corresponds to a stopped symbol, select a special fluctuation pattern based on the special fluctuation pattern selection criteria, and if the symbol fluctuation is at a specific timing other than that corresponding to a stopped symbol. In this case, the normal variation pattern is selected based on the normal variation pattern selection criteria.

Furthermore, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components and expressions of the present invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the pinball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that can suppress an increase in the amount of data even if the number of symbols is increased.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing functional blocks of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a validity determination table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the success/failure lottery value for each setting value. It is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table that is referred to in prior validity determination. It is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile cooperation system. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and a subboard. It is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of the main board in the Pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. 15. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of a sub-board in a pachinko game machine. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. 20. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. 12 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when the sub CPU receives a command from the control CPU. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of decorative pattern fluctuation display. It is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. It is a flowchart showing the process of a small winning game. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a functional block diagram showing the specific game control means in FIG. 4 in detail. It is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table to be referred to in the case of a jackpot. It is a game state transition diagram schematically showing the relationship between each game state and transition trigger. It is a figure which shows typically the validity determination table in a present Example. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the state of symbol fluctuation and the end condition of the easy ball entry state. It is a time chart showing the relationship between a change in the game state and the timing of a left-handed hit warning. It is a flow diagram showing the relationship between the type of special game, the destination performance, and the game state. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of a decorative pattern, an alternative pattern, and a simple pattern. It is a figure showing arrangement of a logo movable accessory and a light guide plate. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the performance timing in the special game of 2R probability variable jackpot. It is a flow diagram showing the production process of the first special variation production. It is a flowchart which shows the production process of the 2nd special variation production. FIG. 7 is a table diagram schematically illustrating the correspondence between types of basic variation patterns and types of variation additional pattern tables. FIG. 7 is a diagram of a table schematically illustrating the correspondence between the types of variable addition patterns and the types of variable addition pattern tables. It is a time chart comparing the time of small winning fluctuation stopping and small winning game with the time of losing fluctuation. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the production stage. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen which displays the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit rush. It is a diagram showing an effect flow from a special game to a small winning rush. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of a special time-saving effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a character selection table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a table reference table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a specific timing table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a scenario selection table. It is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between symbol numbers and symbol classification numbers. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a demonstration time list. It is a diagram schematically showing a symbol classification determination table. It is a flowchart showing the process of symbol classification determination. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process in a specific state period. It is a flowchart showing a specific processing process for each symbol type. It is a diagram schematically showing a specific performance selection table in which the correspondence between combinations of first to third performance elements and jackpot expectation levels is determined. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the process of continuous battle production.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine coexist. The second game is executed preferentially so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. In addition, in order to achieve both of these gaming features, it is equipped with a plurality of starting winning holes, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than the number of jackpot balls in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of winning a jackpot with a variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that constitute a special game in the event of a jackpot (the opening time of the jackpot is longer). A long open unit game with a long opening time and a short open unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is more long open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game. On top of that, we have developed a gameplay in which you aim for the first hit in the first game, and after you are given time savings by hitting the jackpot in the first game, you repeat the aim in the second game to get more balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, Includes a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 is a frame body that has an opening and is used to fix the Pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it is to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides at the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game state and the performance by a means for controlling the performance. Most of the resin member making up the exterior of the door 104 is semi-transparent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors depending on the game state, performance, etc. by a means for controlling the performance, and plays the role of performance by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a gaming area 81 divided by a rail 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over approximately the central part of the game area 81, its upper part, and the right side, and is a decorative resin member provided to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60, and serves as a flow path for the game ball, and the effect display device. It has 60 protection, decoration, etc. functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game balls that have flown in roll, and depending on the way the balls roll, the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11 and the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11. The ball is distributed to the side where the ball does not enter the ball. A movable accessory 66 is provided on the upper part of the center decoration 64, which is driven and performs a performance action according to the content of the performance. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) are installed to form a flow path for game balls. In addition, in this specification, "hitting a ball," "winning a prize," and "falling in" may be mutually synonymous. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entry hole may be configured with a type of "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which the game ball passes; ”, “Award”, “Failure” and “Pass” may also be used as synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible for the player to aim the ball into one of them by changing the firing strength or weakness of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided approximately at the lower center of the gaming area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. If you hit the ball to the left, that is, if you hit the ball relatively weakly with the aim of making it flow toward the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can or will easily enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, but if you hit the ball right-handed, In other words, if the ball is hit relatively strongly with the aim of flowing toward the right-hand passage of the center ornament 64, the ball can or will easily enter the second starting port 12, but the ball cannot enter the first starting port 11. A channel is formed by arranging the game nails so that it is difficult for the ball to enter. However, under normal conditions, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered by the first starting port 11, which prevents the inflow of game balls, so unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12, it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. The win/fail lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to move to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is performed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Ru.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to the extent that it is possible to target either one depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left and right sides of the gaming area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one is difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where the ball can enter the ball or enter the ball easily when the ball is shot to the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow toward the left passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or easily enter the ball when the ball is shot to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly and aimed to flow to the right side passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning prize detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided on the right side of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 usually triggers an opening lottery to determine whether or not to expand the electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display section 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery." After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12. In addition, as a modified example, the number of actuating ports may be one and it may be provided at a position on the left side of the gaming area 81.

The three general winning holes 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The grand prize opening 20 includes a grand prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a grand prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the grand prize opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects when a game ball enters the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening prize information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the big winning opening. The big winning hole 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning hole that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big prize opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34. In addition, as a modification, another grand prize opening may be provided at the lower center of the gaming area 81 or above or below the grand prize opening 20, and a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and is equipped with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through the out port 34 and is ejected, and generates ejection information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost end of the center of the gaming area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A specification may be adopted in which a plurality of out detection devices 39 are arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent ball clogging in the out port 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol reservation display section 71, a second special symbol reservation display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, and a regular symbol display section 45. Display sections such as a hold display section 75, a game status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77 are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display section 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display section 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side in the lower left position, and the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning/failure lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11, and when it is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12, and when the game ball is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are, for example, 8-segment LEDs consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". This is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, which are represented by a combination of segments, are not necessarily in the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols formed by a combination of segments that generally have no meaning. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (e.g. "-") and non-display (e.g. all lights out) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined period of time, the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are not 8-segment LEDs but LED dot arrays, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 51 and second special symbol are displayed by combining the lighting patterns and lighting colors. A special pattern 52 may also be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a dramatic role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the gaming area 81 It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display section 42. However, if a method is adopted in which the special design itself has a dramatic role and is expressed without using a decorative design, the special design will be displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of an 8-segment LED. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the

Above the first special symbol display section 41, a first special symbol reservation display section 71 is provided as a reservation lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, a second special symbol display section 71 is provided. A second special symbol pending display section 72 is provided as a pending lamp for special symbol variations corresponding to the game. The first special figure pending display section 71 is made up of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) is determined by the number of lights or blinking lamps. (also simply referred to as the "pending number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display section 71 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the first start opening 11 during fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display section 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display section 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the second start opening 12 during fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The number of pending lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display section 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the lighting combination of these lamps. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. is expressed. For example, a winning stop pattern is expressed by turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp, a first winning mode is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp, and a winning pattern is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning off the second lamp. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol holding display section 75 is provided as a holding lamp for normal symbol fluctuations. The normal symbol holding display section 75 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of pending normal symbol variations based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The pending number of normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the normal symbol fluctuation, and the number of normal symbol drawings in which the normal symbol fluctuation has not yet been executed. shows.

Note that the symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The gaming state display section 76 is a display section that displays a display corresponding to a gaming state such as a specific gaming state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting up a lamp when the probability is changing, blinking when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, and turning off the lamp when it is in the normal state, and a 7-segment LED when a special game is being executed. The number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in that special game is displayed. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that reports an abnormality in a part of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and reports an abnormality using a lighting pattern depending on the type of abnormality. Note that these display sections may not be arranged together in the symbol etc. display unit 120, but each display section may be configured individually, or may be configured separately into a plurality of display devices grouped together as appropriate. Further, the notification of a gaming state such as a specific gaming state may be configured to be made only for a predetermined period, such as a certain period of time after recovery from power-off, for example.

A performance display device 60 is provided approximately in the center of the game area 81 so that the screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by a center decoration 64, and displays a decorative pattern 61 that is linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Displays changes in the included effect images. Hereinafter, such a display will be referred to as a "symbol variation" or "variable display".

The performance display device 60 is a display device configured with a liquid crystal display that displays a decorative pattern 61 in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually presenting the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as a decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols, simulating a slot machine game, fluctuate, for example, in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols consisting of numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and are varied, and a win or a miss is indicated by a combination of three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of designs constituting the decorative design 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors or patterns, but there is a picture or design common to all the designs for these numbers, letters, and symbols. It may be configured by adding different designs to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the theme of decoration or performance set for the relevant model of Pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 can be switched in accordance with the development of the production, between a case where a pattern including the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The configuration may be such that the In the background of the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 61, a moving image having a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for the relevant model of the Pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern fluctuations.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display that is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, and the width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be large enough to be more than half the width of the game area. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball path on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the ball with maximum strength in what is called a "right-handed hit", it will almost certainly go through the right path. It is possible to pass the game ball to the ball, and it can be differentiated from what is called "left-handed hitting." The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes may be combined, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal, and the sub liquid crystal may be placed adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, such as a firing handle. (upper sphere, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured with a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured with a mechanical display means such as a drum rotating type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The performance button 109 is an operation input means that is pressed by the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the performance, and changes are made to the content of the performance etc. in accordance with the manner in which the button is pressed. The production button 109 is provided in the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112 in a state of protruding to the outside, and the player can grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input predetermined instructions to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means by which a player inputs a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

The gaming method and control flow performed in the gaming machine configured as described above will be outlined. When the player manually rotates the firing handle 107, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one by the rail 82 and fired into the game area 81 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotational position of the firing handle 107, the firing of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. A game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, etc., and falls in a direction depending on how it hits. When a game ball falls into each winning hole of the general winning hole 33, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the big winning hole 20, the prize ball depending on the type of winning hole is placed in the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. The ball is dispensed into the ball tray 106. A game ball that has fallen into each winning hole such as the general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball that has fallen into the out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The discharge of the safe ball may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe ball may also be guided to an area where the out detection device 39 is provided, and all discharged therefrom will be detected by the out detection device 39. You can also use it as Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which the number of safe balls detected and the number of detected out balls is added to the number of detected out balls as the number of ejected balls, without guiding safe balls and detecting safe balls by the out detection device 39.

Further, when a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display section 45, and is stopped and displayed after a variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped and displayed symbols and the game state when the symbols were stopped and displayed. . That is, when the gaming state when the symbols are stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. In addition, if the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state), the normal symbol will be displayed in the second winning mode during normal and specific gaming states (for example, an easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long open are set to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol will win with a probability of 1/100, and in that case, the short opening execution probability (probability that the winning symbol in the first winning mode will be selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting a winning symbol in the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in an open lottery in a specific gaming state (for example, an easy-to-enter state), the normal symbol will win with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probabilities of the first winning mode and the second winning mode are the same as in the normal gaming mode. However, it is set so that the long opening will be executed no matter which way the prize is won. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, there is a function to change the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability changes from 1/100 to 99/100) and an extension function to extend the opening time (the opening time when stopped and displayed in the first winning mode is 0). .1 seconds to 6.0 seconds), it is easier to enter the second starting port 12. Note that the function (long opening) for extending the operating period of the normal electric accessory 90 is sometimes referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as mentioned above, by setting the probability of long opening in the normal state to be higher than the probability of short opening, when the normal symbol is won, long opening will be executed at a certain rate even in the normal state. . As a modified example, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, or the probability of both may be the same, or the specification may be such that short opening always occurs. good. Furthermore, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be configured to use three functions, including a function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, to enhance the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12. In this case, the normal symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy ball entry state. Note that the winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is held in the easy entry state. Furthermore, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance, or the suspension of the normal symbol change may be predicted and the notification may be made before the normal symbol begins to change, or the normal symbol change may be notified in advance. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may also be a mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of combinations of opening time and number of openings are prepared and one is selected. For example, when opening for 2 seconds three times, the total opening time is the same as when opening for 6 seconds once, but if the interval period is included, the former is longer than the latter. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, if the player notices the opening and changes the direction of ball hitting from that point on to the second starting port 12, the ball will be hit by the former. It can be said that there is a long chance. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expanding mechanism may be different depending on the winning type. For example, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit, in the normal state it is opened for 0.1 seconds once, in the easy entry state it is opened for 1 second three times, and when it becomes the second hit, the normal state is In this case, the ball may be opened for 6 seconds once, and the ball may be opened for 2 seconds twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, , and a decorative pattern 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variation pattern from the start to the stop of the variation. The decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable presentation pattern in which the manner of variation from the start to the stop of the variation is determined. Multiple types of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared, and each has varying lengths of time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed in accordance with the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed in accordance with the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. For each variation pattern, a variation display time is determined for each pattern as an end condition for the symbol variation, and the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 change when the variation display time elapses. will be stopped. Hereinafter, while illustrating the variable display of the decorative symbols 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern, the variable effect pattern will be briefly explained. Note that details such as a method for determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation effect pattern will be explained separately.

As an example of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 61, first, when the fluctuation starts, the symbols in all three rows are fluctuated, like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine, and when the fluctuation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one, so that the final stop mode is achieved. Display the symbol combination as. Note that the operation when the decorative pattern 190 stops fluctuating may be controlled so that multiple rows are stopped at the same time instead of one row at a time to draw attention to effects other than the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display, or in a shorter fluctuating time. It may also be possible to display symbol variations. In addition, as an operation when the decorative pattern 190 starts to fluctuate, the start of fluctuation of some columns is controlled to be delayed depending on the subsequent development of the fluctuation (type of performance pattern, etc.) to create a sense of anticipation. You can also do this.

Next, the variable performance pattern will be briefly explained. The variable performance patterns include a normal out-of-reach performance pattern, a reach-out performance pattern, and a reach-out jackpot performance pattern. The normal winning performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying an out-of-reach symbol combination after going through a reach-in state in which a jackpot is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The reach jackpot performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a jackpot symbol combination after reaching the reach state. In particular, the patterns that go through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time, and reach patterns with relatively short fluctuation times are called "normal reach," and reach patterns with long fluctuation times are called "super reach." ”. The normal out-of-reach performance pattern, out-of-reach performance pattern, and reach-to-reach jackpot performance pattern each include a normal pattern that is displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern that is displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol fluctuation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will change in probability or the probability that the number of unit games in the special game will increase will increase. Since this can be said to be a higher chance state than the first fluctuation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance performance may be used that indicates that there is a chance of a relatively advantageous jackpot. In the embodiment, a time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since time saving is involved in the variable probability state, the time saving pattern is also used in the variable probability state. However, in a modified example, a pattern for variable probability, which is different from that for time saving, may be used in the variable probability state. Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which a common pattern is used for time saving and variable probability, or a specification in which a pattern for variable probability is used in a variable probability state without using a pattern for time saving.

In addition, when the number of pending lottery results reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened compared to normal in order to increase gaming efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation"). Similarly, when the number of pending winning/failure drawings becomes 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is further shortened compared to the above case of 3 symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation") in order to further improve gaming efficiency. ). When the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stopping state indicating a jackpot after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is started. The stopping mode of the decorative pattern 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which three types of symbols match.

There are two types of special games: a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a large difference in the profits depending on the winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demonstration time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big prize opening 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after nine or more game balls have fallen, it is temporarily closed. The process from opening to closing of the big prize opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but it may be opened for a short time multiple times during one unit game. After the opening/closing of the big prize opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called an end demonstration time. Normally, in special games, you can fully expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls out") by playing 10 unit games, making a big profit. is obtained. A special game in which unit games are repeated 10 times is also appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which unit games are repeated 4 times is also appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, in some unit games, the big prize opening 20 is opened for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds), so that the unit game is actually repeated a small number of times. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantially nR jackpot") similar to the above.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost nonexistent (such as 0.1 seconds), and the big prize opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The shortened special game is completed by repeating this unit game twice. In the shortened special game, the opening of the big winning hole 20 for a very short period of time is repeated only twice, so very few balls can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls actually coming out is almost zero or a small number (for example, only a few balls). This is a special game in which the number of payouts is equal to the number of payouts depending on the number of balls that enter one round, such as about 10 balls to about 1 to 2 balls per round. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as the normal special game, it is also possible to realize a shortened special game by opening the big prize opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

In addition, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small winning mode after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, a small winning game consisting of one unit game is played. Then, the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting a small winning game, the big prize opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar in appearance to a 2R jackpot.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop symbol at that time is in a specific form (for example, "777"), after the special game ends, a probability change that is one of the specific games is further started. During probability change, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than in a normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with variable probability, may not be clearly shown in the appearance, and may be in a latent probability variable state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, even if the game is changing with certainty, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether it is changing with certainty or not. In addition, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be indicated on the effect display device 60 whether the change is definite or non-definite.

In the normal game after the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state that is one of the specific game states is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is made higher than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. Not only can the number of hits of normal symbols per certain period of time increase, but also the ease of entering the second starting port 12 increases, so there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12 are increased, and as a result, it becomes possible to continue playing the game while hardly reducing the number of balls you have or gradually increasing the number of balls you have.

In the ball entry easy state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations, is reached. If a jackpot occurs beforehand, the time saving will end once. In time saving, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened, so compared to the normal state where the symbol variations are made with the normal variation time, it will take until the jackpot occurs. It is possible to shorten the time required to obtain a jackpot, and to relatively increase the ease of winning a jackpot. In a modified example, a specification may be adopted in which the time saving of the special symbol is not performed in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the Pachinko gaming machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the Pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes overall gaming operations, particularly the lottery when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content on the effect display device 60, and in particular changes the effect-like display content according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in response to winnings to each winning hole. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The firing device 156 fires the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 into the game area 81 one ball at a time. The firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the firing device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display section 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display section 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, which indicates the ratio of the total number of awarded balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to any one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be to the player.If the jackpot probabilities from settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, then M1≦M2≦M3. The jackpot probability for each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a setting value that is set. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and displays, and a setting memory that stores set setting values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for transitioning to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, turn off the power switch 150, insert a setting key into the setting key cylinder 171, turn the setting key to turn it on, and then turn on the power switch 150 to transition to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. To shift to the setting change state, turn on the power switch 150 while pressing down the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, turn on the power switch 150 without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When transitioning to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating setting 1 is displayed as the initial value of the game setting on the setting display section 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , the state becomes playable. On the other hand, when transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. Thereafter, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned off, the game becomes ready for playing. Note that when the setting key is turned off and the game is enabled, the setting display section 173 turns off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clearing is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), the RAM clear is executed and the setting change state is entered. Furthermore, if the power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being pressed while the setting key is off, the power will be restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-on state, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display section may function as the performance display section 159 when in the game ready state, and may function as the setting display section 173 when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided so that game settings cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The functions realized using each configuration will be described below, but in this specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, etc., the physical configuration For convenience, the terminology may be used as is for parts that have already been explained.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates power to be used within the gaming machine based on alternating current power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operations of the game and the progress of the game. A main board 200 as a main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the gaming area, and a control board 157 that controls performance operations and processing. It is configured in such a manner that functions are shared with a sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a special winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the opening 33b), the output opening 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received therebetween. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by transmitting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the prize ball payout and the control state of the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200. At the same time, it also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The dispensing device 154 includes a dispensing motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball sending device 164, and controls the ball sending device 164 and the ball sending device 164 based on a shooting permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to fire the game ball. The sub-board 300 includes a production display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, a production input operation device 115 (production button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and an electrical connection. are connected to each other, and various control signals are sent and received between them.

Data is transmitted and received between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. In order to realize the overall operation by transmitting and receiving data in one direction, each structure is connected to the main board 200. It is placed on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission is I can't even make a request. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Furthermore, data is exchanged bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as with the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. It may also be configured to transmit and receive data.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, firing control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks may be attached to other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a regular lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening/closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut-off processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
Ball entry determining means 201 determines whether a game ball enters each winning hole. Ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 11 when receiving the first starting winning information, and determines that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 12 when receiving the second starting winning information. to decide. A ball entry determining means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the large winning hole 20 when receiving the large winning hole winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 33 when receiving the general winning information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 upon receiving the passing information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 upon receiving the ejection information. The entry determining means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and causes the performance display section 159 to display the ratio. The ball entry determining means 201 calculates the number of balls paid out ÷ the number of out balls when the probability of hitting the jackpot is in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low ball entry state). The value of is displayed on the performance display section 159. Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers for use in various decisions by the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the common symbol lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win/fail lottery values") used in the win/fail lottery by the first win/fail judgment means 221 and the second win/fail judgment means 222. A random number within the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. The random number generation means 202 also generates random numbers ranging from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern determination lottery value") used in determining the fluctuation pattern by the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232. '' is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers to be used in the winning/failure lottery by the common symbol lottery means 213. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used when determining the normal symbol. Note that "random numbers" here include not only physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit and true random numbers in a mathematical sense, but also pseudorandom numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But that's fine. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generation means, or may be generated by different generation means. .

<Puzu lottery means 213>
The normal symbol lottery means 213 generates a random number to be used for the winning/failure lottery of the normal symbol and a random number to be used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. 202 and execute the lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol validity determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the validity of a regular symbol, and a regular symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of a regular symbol to be displayed on the regular symbol display section 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol validity determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for the success/failure lottery and the winning, and the normal symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol, as described above. The correctness of the normal symbol and the stopping symbol are determined based on the probability of winning and the probability of selecting the symbol. If the lottery value for the normal symbol winning/failure lottery corresponds to a hit, the normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table, and determines the lottery value for the winning/failure lottery of the normal symbol. If it corresponds to a miss, the mode of the miss symbol 1 is always determined. When the result of the judgment of the normal symbol is a hit and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds when the opening is short and 6 seconds when the opening is long. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily suspended by a suspension control means 240, which will be described later. However, the lottery value is put on hold only if the predetermined upper limit number of holds held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has the functions of executing the first lottery related to the first game, including a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/failure determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The device includes means 231 and executes a first win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the entry of a ball into the first starting port 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 41 by the main display control means 250. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second validity determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second fluctuation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol 52 to be displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display section 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211, triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 11. Specifically, the first lottery value for determining the validity by the first validity determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern. The first pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second lottery value for determining the validity by the second validity determining means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second fluctuation pattern. The second pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means.

The first win/fail determination means 221 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the first win/fail lottery value. The second win/fail determination means 222 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the second win/fail lottery value. In the win/fail judgment, more specifically, "Jackpot" indicates a transition to a special game, "Small win" indicates a transition to a small win game, and "Small win" indicates a transition to a special game or a small win game. It is determined which of the following applies. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold a validity determination table that is referred to in the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the propriety judgment performed at the time of starting symbol variation from the preliminary propriety judgment described later, it is also appropriately called "properness judgment as main judgment." Note that in this specification, the term "table" or "selection criteria" strictly refers to a table structure that defines the correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating a choice. It does not only refer to data, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence relationship is realized by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter. Including these, the concept is essentially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria." In addition, when using a table structure, essentially one type of selection criteria may be configured by a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when referring to "multiple types of selection criteria", the subdivisions It indicates the actual number of types of tables, not the number of tables that are standardized.

The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective validity determinations as validity determination tables to be referred to in the validity determination. Specifically, the validity determination table for validity determination by the first validity determination means 221 (also referred to as "first validity determination table"), and the validity determination table for validity determination by the second validity determination means 222 ("second validity determination table"). It holds a table (also referred to as "appropriate judgment table") and selects the table to be referred to depending on the judgment to be executed. In the plurality of success/failure determination tables, the determination results of jackpot, small win, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the win/fail probability is determined according to the associated jackpot range setting. In addition, multiple types of success/failure determination tables corresponding to multiple game settings are prepared, and for example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the success/failure determination table has a different correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result. will be prepared. Note that if the probabilities of jackpot, small win, and loss are the same among a plurality of game settings, a common success/failure determination table may be prepared for the plurality of game settings.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the validity determination table. This figure shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/fail judgment table in this figure, the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the jackpot win/fail probability and the small win win/fail probability are determined according to the associated range settings. is determined. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 refer to the validity determination table shown in this figure in the validity determination as the main determination. In both the first lottery by the first lottery by the first lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery, a jackpot is usually won only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of jackpot is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the gaming state. In addition, in this figure, the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability is shown using a single success/failure judgment table, but the success/failure judgment table may be prepared separately for normal and variable probability. It may be prepared separately for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, if it falls within a predetermined range, it will be a small win. In the example of this figure, a small win occurs when the winning lottery value obtained by the first winning/failure determining means 221 falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, and the winning lottery value obtained by the second winning/failing determining means 222 falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range that corresponds to a small win is wider in the first win/fail lottery than in the second win/fail lottery, and the small win is more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a jackpot, it is originally a "lose", but in the example in this figure, the range of winning/fail lottery values when it does not correspond to a jackpot and does not correspond to a small hit. In particular, he describes it as ``outlier.'' In other words, if "win or fail" is understood from the perspective of "whether it is a jackpot or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in the broad sense of "miss" in the sense of "not a jackpot." In addition, when considering "win or no" from the perspective of "hit or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in a broader sense of "hit" along with a "big hit." Note that although this figure shows an example in which the judgment table for jackpot and the judgment table for small hit are realized in the form of a single judgment table, it is also possible to realize each as separate tables. good. Furthermore, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/failure determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the win/fail lottery value for each set value. This figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determining means 221 and the win/fail determination result. This figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determining means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value that result in a jackpot in normal and variable times is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", If the setting value is "3", it is 0 to 296; if the setting value is "4", it is 0 to 297; if the setting value is "5", it is 0 to 298; if the setting value is "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, the larger the set value is, the wider the range of winning/failure lottery values that will result in a jackpot in normal times increases the probability of a jackpot in normal times. In addition, the range of the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value that will result in a jackpot only when the probability is variable (in other words, it will be a miss during normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959, if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969, if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979, if the setting value is "5", 299 to 2989, if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, as the set value increases, the range of lottery values that will result in a jackpot when the probability changes increases, and the probability of a jackpot when the probability changes also increases. Note that the range of the winning lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot in normal times, and the probability variable jackpot probability, which is a jackpot in probability variable situations, is constant regardless of the set value. In this diagram, the range of winning/failure lottery values is determined so that the jackpot probability during variable times is 10 times the jackpot probability during normal times, and is common to all setting values "1" to "6". . Further, the range of winning/failure lottery values is determined so that the probability of a small winning is also constant regardless of the set value. For all setting values "1" to "6", if the range of the first lottery value falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, it will be a small win, and if the range of the second lottery value falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535, it will be a small win. It's a hit. A range of winning/failure lottery values outside the range that constitutes a jackpot or small win is considered a "miss". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning lottery value and the winning/failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between different setting values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopping symbol when the symbol starts changing based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the validity determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the results of the validity determination by the first validity determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 stores the validity determination results determined by the second validity determination means 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables are maintained according to the determination results. The first win/fail judgment means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be referred to when a jackpot is won, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to when a small hit is made, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a loss to be referred to when a loss occurs. The second win/fail judgment means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be referred to at the time of a jackpot, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a loss to be referred to at the time of a loss. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to depending on the result of the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as main determination."

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss, and FIG. 7(c) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss. This table is referred to when the result of the judgment is a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the main symbol in symbol determination as the main determination. In each symbol determination table, a correspondence relationship between numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss, respectively, with "0" to "4" corresponding to the jackpot, "5" to "9" corresponding to the small win, "10" corresponds to a miss. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a jackpot and a probability change after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99". 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with variable probability as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "100 to 149", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, It is associated with "145-149". Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with variable probability, and type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each type of jackpot (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring the system so that one type of jackpot is determined according to the types of multiple special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of types of symbols and increase the number of jackpots. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide the jackpot into more types in response to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined to correspond to each of the types of special symbols selected during the first lottery and the types of special symbols selected during the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation ratio to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the entire range of symbol lottery values when the result of the judgment is negative. Therefore, in the case of a miss, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed when the player misses.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". Type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100-149", type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150-199", and type "9" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200-255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area on the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as the preliminary symbol determination table also in preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol as a result of preliminary symbol determination to determine whether it is a first winning lottery or a second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending items. In addition, as a preliminary symbol determination table, it is also possible to use a table that is further subdivided to enable complex determinations, or a table that summarizes and simplifies the determination range of jackpot symbols for executing similar special games. . In addition, when a symbol is uniformly determined in the event of a miss as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value or without preparing a symbol determination table for the case of a miss. You may decide.

<First fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and second fluctuation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 acquires from the random number generating means 202 a fluctuation pattern in which the display process of symbol fluctuations to be displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the performance display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the one-pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 converts a variation pattern in which a display process of symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined into a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from among multiple fluctuation patterns. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 each refer to the fluctuation pattern table and determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation when starting the symbol fluctuation. Further, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 perform a preliminary pattern determination to determine which fluctuation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 have a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Preliminary pattern determination tables used to generate information for determining execution of prefetch processing at the time of ball entry are held or shared. The variation pattern has a fixed variation time from the start of the variation to the stop when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is essentially determined for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbol is displayed. fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the variation pattern determination executed at the start of symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of a decorative pattern variation effect pattern to be described later, different types of variation patterns may be defined even though they have the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table shown in FIG. 3(a) in the normal state, and refer to the table shown in FIG. 3(b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the normal state, if the judgment result is incorrect, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "3". 2". If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, select pattern range number "4", "Out of reach". For "no reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations, such as a 10 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 0 to 2, a 7 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 3, and a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds when the number of reservations is 3. When is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example will be explained in which the variation is mainly classified into five types according to the variation time, but a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each of these variation patterns on the sub-board 300, and there are several dozen types of variation effect patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "Out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, it is as shown in figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "Out of reach" becomes smaller. The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the higher the probability that a variation pattern with a longer variation time will be selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123. If the number is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "8". 2".

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 2R jackpot or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3" which is the super reach of pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122. If it is 123 to 255, select "Normal 3" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the preliminary determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called pre-read result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second win/fail lottery and the number of pending items. In the example shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each success/failure determination result in the preliminary pattern determination. In addition to deriving only the information regarding which range the sub-board 300 is located, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary appropriateness determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all the variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern lottery values and the variation time is the same as in FIG. 8(a) except for "No reach shortfall", which is selected for a miss. “No-reach shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “No-reach, no-reach” in FIG. 8(a). For "No Reach and Missing Shortening", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, a 10 second fluctuation pattern is used, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 4, a 1 second fluctuation pattern is selected. are selected respectively. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery. It is not desirable for the player to have a situation where the number of pending draws for the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is executed continuously. Therefore, in the out-of-ball variation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a variation pattern table is referred to in which a long variation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations. It may also be a thing.

<Suspension control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reservation control means 240 includes a special symbol reservation means 241 and a regular symbol reservation means 242. The special symbol holding means 241 controls the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the previously acquired first lottery value or second lottery value when the first lottery value or the second lottery value is newly acquired. is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first or second winning lottery value or second winning lottery value is suspended, and the winning lottery value is stored until the start of the variable display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for the first special symbols, the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, and for the second special symbols, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, A second winning/failure lottery value, a second symbol lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The standard figure holding means 242 stores the standard figure lottery value acquired by the standard figure lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. These numbers of reservations are represented by the number of lights or blinking numbers of the first special symbol reservation display section 71, the second special symbol reservation display section 72, and the regular symbol reservation display section 75, respectively. The number of reserved figures by the special figure retaining means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning lottery held in the special symbol holding means 241 is consumed preferentially over the lottery value of the first winning lottery, and symbol fluctuations are displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value of the jackpot is held as the first lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a jackpot is suspended in the first lottery, it is possible to win a plurality of consecutive jackpots by continuing to hit until a jackpot is suspended in the second lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a regular symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the fluctuation pattern determined in response to the determination result of the first lottery by the first lottery means 211. let The first special symbol control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the fluctuation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212. let The second special symbol control means 252 also makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed.

The first special symbol control means 251 suspends the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first lottery when the special symbol holding means 241 stores the winning lottery value of the second winning lottery. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second prize lottery regardless of whether the special symbol holding means 241 stores the prize lottery value of the first prize lottery. As a result, when lottery values are reserved for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the lottery values reserved for the second lottery are read out preferentially and symbol variations are displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first win/fail lottery is not read out and its symbol variation does not start until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 by a command communication means 205, which will be described later, at the timing of starting and stopping the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is a value indicating each of the judgment result determined or determined, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern, and a value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. The ordinary symbol control means 254 causes the ordinary symbol display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 as a fluctuating display of ordinary symbols.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. The special symbol adjustment means 276 adjusts the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. 52 is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always used preferentially, and the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a continuous manner.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example adjusts the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively displayed in a variable manner. For example, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in the order, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the order of fluctuations. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the winning/failure lottery values. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, that is, the order in which the winning lottery values are held in the holding control means 240, it is easy for the player to visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modification, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined extinguishing order regardless of the order of ball entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are on hold, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately and variably displayed. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, the player can easily grasp the order of change intuitively.

Also, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols does not start while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Prior determination means 235>
The preliminary determination means 235 includes a first lottery preliminary determination means 236 and a second lottery preliminary determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 stores various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the first validity determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the first special symbol control means 251 starts varying the first special symbol. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 stores various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the second validity determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the second special symbol control means 252 starts to vary the second special symbol.

The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 includes a first preliminary lottery value determination table, a first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table, and a first preliminary variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for preliminary determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 uses the first preliminary lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first fluctuation pattern lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first preliminary fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information regarding the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by a command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing an a priori appropriateness determination table that is referred to in the prior appropriateness determination. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) refers to the first preliminary lottery value determination table of FIG. 9(a) when the ball enters the first starting port 11, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is between "300 and 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56,500 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning/failure determination result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As mentioned above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) is transmitted to the first starting port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of balls into the game (indicating that it is a first win/fail lottery), the information indicating the number of balls on hold, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) refers to the second preliminary lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) when the ball enters the second starting port 12, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is between "300 and 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64,000 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the second preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second starting port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is a second winning lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

It should be noted that the various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination results by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in predetermined preliminary determination result storage areas up to four pieces each, similar to the number of pending memories. Note that the preliminary determination result may be stored using a suspension storage area stored by the suspension control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207), which will be described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the area with other areas or erasing information based on completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, a judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing a table exclusively for the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game may be used. A part or all of a common preliminary determination table may be shared. In this way, by sharing the table with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity on the main board 200 can be reduced. Note that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the advance determination means 235 may be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of validity, for example. In addition, the random number values obtained by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205, without making a determination by the preliminary determination means 235, and 300 may be used to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The advance determination unit 235 may refer to a preliminary success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the success/failure lottery values and the preliminary success/failure determination results differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned win/fail determination table, multiple types of advance win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched depending on the set value of the game settings. In addition, an advance lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the validity may be determined in advance based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the preliminary validity determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. This figure (a) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236, and this figure (b) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237. When the winning lottery value is “0 to 294”, the preliminary judgment result is “11”, indicating that all settings 1 to 6 result in a jackpot. When the win/fail lottery value is "295", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 2 or higher or in all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "296", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "13", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting of 3 or higher or at all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "297", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 4 or higher or in all settings in the probability variable. When the win/fail lottery value is "298", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "15", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/fail lottery value is "299", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "16", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting 6 or all settings during the variable probability. Further, when the winning lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning judgment result is "21", indicating that it is a jackpot in all settings at the time of probability variation. When the win/fail lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "22", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 2 or higher at the time of probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is set to 3 or higher. When the winning lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning judgment result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the preliminary winning judgment result is "25", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is changed to 5 or more. When the winning lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning judgment result is "26", indicating that a jackpot is achieved at setting 6 at the time of probability variation. Furthermore, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary prize determination result is " 30'', indicating a small hit in all settings. In addition, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the preliminary prize determination result is " 40'', indicating that all settings are out of range. By using such a preliminary propriety determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary propriety determination result for each set value of the game settings.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 activates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning/failure lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 controls when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating conditions are satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big prize opening 20 is continued a plurality of times in succession, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special games include a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 4 times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose open time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. In addition, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is met, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small winning game control means 265>
The small winning game control means 265 operates the small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20, thereby executing a small winning game. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small win, the small winning game control means 265 controls the small winning game control means 265 to control the small winning game when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode. It is determined that the win game operating conditions are satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20 to execute the small win game.

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the variable probability state, time saving state, and easy ball entry state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state, and an easy ball entry state after the special game ends when the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a shift to a variable probability state. The variable probability state, time saving state, and easy entry state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is approximately shortened. do. However, in the normal state, by referring to the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of reservations of the winning lottery value by the reservation control means 240, the smaller the number of reservations by the reservation control means 240, the more likely a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time will appear. In the easy entry state, entry into the second starting port 12 is performed by performing at least one of three functions: changing the probability of normal symbols, shortening the time of normal symbols, and extending the opening of the second starting port 12. Pitch frequency (ease of ball entry) improves. During the probability change state, the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be extended to open when a specific jackpot is reached, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. Transition to a variable state with a higher probability than the normal state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls opening/closing of the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the short opening or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second starting port 12 in the long opening time in the ball entry easy state. 2 Open the starting port 12. This improves the ease of entering balls into the second starting port 12 and allows the player to continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning hole solenoid 92 to open the big winning hole 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power failure processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes a control start processing for the main board 200 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored from a power failure. The main power-off processing execution unit 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. Note that the control start process, abnormality response process, and abnormality detection process for the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting change state to be entered as described above. The setting change means 286 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the setting change state is entered. The setting change means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →... in response to the press of the setting change button 172. , updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display section 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting values stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173.

Note that the setting value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but instead the numerical values of "0" to "5". In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , the setting value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the setting value data, it will not be judged as abnormal when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the setting value data is set to the initial value "0". can be simplified. Another advantage is that when performing some kind of lottery using setting value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each setting value in prefetch processing, the offset processing for selection can be simplified. . For example, when using "1" to "6" as set value data, additional processing such as subtracting the start address by 1 is required when using these values as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using "0" to "5" as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as is as the offset data. Note that when the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 use numerical values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, they may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173, or A value obtained by adding +1 to the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of payout etc. to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of production control etc. to the sub-board 300. It includes a command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command that instructs the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the determination of the ball entering each winning hole by the ball entering determining means 201, and sends a payout command to the main board 200. Sends a command indicating the status of the error that occurred. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the performance determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 controls the variation at the timing at which the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is the judgment result determined or determined, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the variation patterns, and the value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 11, second starting opening) corresponding to the preliminary determination result are It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the opening 12), the information on the number of pending tickets, the gaming state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the sub-board 300 realizes a process called "pre-reading" in which the sub-board 300 can inferentially recognize the validity result in advance, based on the received preliminary determination result, before the turn to start symbol variation comes around. Note that processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 receives information regarding the special game by the special game control means 260, information regarding the small winning game by the small winning game controlling means 265, information on the lottery result by the general drawing lottery means 213, and information set by the setting changing means 286. Setting value information for game settings is transmitted to the sub-board 300. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 also controls various controls on the main board 200 or sends information to the main board 200, such as information regarding initial processing and information regarding errors by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information regarding various signals and the like is transmitted to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determining means 303, a performance control means 304, a clocking means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power cutoff processing execution means 362, It includes a sub-error detection means 364, a command reception means 370, and a sub-side preliminary determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content and the display process to be displayed on the effect display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes. The production patterns include a plurality of variation production patterns in which the variation process and performance process from the start of variation to the stop of variation in the variation display of the decorative symbols 61 are determined, and the expectation level for a jackpot that is displayed separately from the variation display of the decorative symbols. The display includes a plurality of preview performance patterns that preliminarily suggest the height of the variable display before the display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal performance determining means 373 causes the performance control means 304 to display the information on the performance display device 60 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, 108, the content of the effect to be output to the decorative lamp 111 etc. is determined. The performance determining means 303 determines the content of the performance according to the setting values of the game settings transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-read effect determining means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal performance determining means 373 selects from a plurality of variable performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determining means 373 sends information on the read variable performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable performance pattern. Note that there may be cases where the normal effect determining means 373 determines the variable effect pattern by referring to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variable effect pattern may be determined in conjunction with the content of the pre-read effect by the pre-read effect determining means 374. There may be cases where a performance pattern is determined. The pre-read performance determining means 374 specifies the result of the main judgment with more precision based on the preliminary judgment result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary judgment result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, etc., and specifies the result. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the main determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead performance determining means 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in a probability-changing game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the preliminary determination result that is earlier than the previously received preliminary determination result. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the determination result, determine whether or not the final determination is valid or not based on the preliminary determination result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution contents of the pre-reading effect based on the specified results. . Note that the performance determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal performance determining means 373 and the look-ahead performance determining means 374 cooperate, so the description will be given as the performance determining means 303 that includes both, except for particularly necessary parts.

For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The effect determining means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of effect images having the same variation time according to a variable pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 61 and their arrangement based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbols of the special symbols, the variation patterns of the special symbols, the decorations, etc. Determined according to the fluctuation performance pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopped symbols to the performance control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table that should be referred to in order to determine the stop symbols of decorative symbols.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, and for example, when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. A specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. If the result of the judgment is a 2R jackpot or a small hit, a specific combination, such as "357", is selected, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations in which all three symbols are aligned. You don't have to. If the result of the judgment is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" where the three symbols are not aligned, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R jackpot or small hit. Combinations that are not applicable are selected. If the winning/failure judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern indicating a hit with reach is selected, a combination in which only one symbol is not aligned, such as "191" or "727" Select.

The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the presentation process from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative pattern. The variable production patterns include a pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol, a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after going through a reach state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, and a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after reaching a reach state. Contains patterns when doing so. In particular, the patterns when passing through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time. For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of a decorative symbol whose variation time is equal to that of the special symbol, depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time-saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a time-saving pattern, the performance determination means 303 selects a variation whose performance content for time-saving is determined. Select a performance pattern. The time-saving production content is a production in which background video and audio are output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to time savings or probability changes.

The preview performance pattern is a performance pattern in which images, animations, videos, etc. of a specific character or motif are temporarily displayed on the screen, a performance pattern in which a role model is made to move, and a performance pattern in which a specific sound is output. The performance based on the preview performance pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high expectation that the symbol variation will stop in a jackpot manner. For example, there is a normal preview effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group preview effect in which a group of characters is displayed as they pass from one end of the screen to the other. Further, a step-up preview performance is included in which the display process of the preview performance is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The preview performance patterns include a pattern in which the display is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state and foretells the final stop state of the symbol (post-reach notice), and a pattern in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state (post-reach notice). There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not normally stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview performance on the performance display device 60 according to the judgment result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-judgment result by a predetermined preview lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and also sets the preliminary performance. Determine the preview performance pattern. The performance determining means 303 holds a preview determination table to be referred to in order to decide whether to display a preview performance, and a preview type table to be referred to when selecting the type of preview performance pattern. The preview decision table is set so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the lottery or preliminary determination, and the preview effect is displayed with a higher probability when the lottery is a win than when it is a loss. Thus, the correspondence between the determination result of the winning lottery and whether or not to display the preview effect is determined. Thereby, the display of the preview performance itself can indicate a high degree of expectation for a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to variably display the performance image including the decorative pattern 61 in accordance with the selected variable performance pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start changing the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance determining means 303 determines that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 displays a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern on the performance display device 60 in a form that is superimposed on the symbol variation performance. let

The production control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first lottery when the winning lottery value of the second winning lottery is stored, and determines whether the winning lottery value of the first winning lottery is stored. Irrespective of whether the lottery is successful or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second lottery is started. As a result, if the lottery values are reserved for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the lottery values reserved for the second lottery are read out preferentially, and changes in the decorative symbols are displayed. . In such a case, the lottery values held in the first win/fail lottery are not read out and the decorative symbols do not start changing until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display a pattern variation effect including a variable display of the decorative patterns 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The performance control means 304 includes a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is displayed in a variable manner, but in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is treated as the main performance content. A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the fact that the symbols are changing is presented to the player by displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol smaller in size than the normal sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also referred to as a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern."

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative design is a form of decorative design for visually indicating the result of judgment, and has a display form that is simpler (in other words, simplified or simplified) than the normal decorative design, and It is displayed in a more simplified variation process. The alternative design usually has a display form in appearance corresponding to a part indicating the design type of the decorative design, for example, has a display form showing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the design type. Further, the alternative design is displayed in a variable manner in a narrower area than the area in which the decorative design is normally displayed in a variable manner, and typically in a position where it is difficult to interfere with the main performance by elements other than the design, for example, in a corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. Fluctuations are displayed. Although the alternative designs are displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative designs, they have a display form that allows at least the type of the design to be visually identified. The alternative design may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggest a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the lottery will be advantageous to the player due to the combination of the stop modes at the end of the variation. For example, when a plurality of alternative symbols are used, a ready-to-reach state in which two of the three alternative symbol types are available suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in the variation is high. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state may be specific types of symbols that suggest relatively high expectations such as "3" and "7", and the symbols that indicate relatively high expectations such as "1" and "2". By using a type of symbol that suggests a relatively low level, it may indicate whether the level of expectation of the reach state is high or low. Note that the alternative symbol does not appear to be in a definitive stopped state, but is in a temporary stopped state in which a slight oscillation is maintained. After the alternative symbol is temporarily stopped, a normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in a fixed stopped state. Further, the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern are not displayed exclusively, but the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued, and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbols, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60, the special symbol is fluctuating with an image of the same size or smaller than the alternative symbol. A simple pattern that suggests something may be displayed in a variable manner. A simple pattern may be composed of a variable display of a combination of three symbols in the same way as a normal decorative pattern, a variable display of a single symbol, or a simple symbol (such as "○" or "×"). It may also be configured to switch sequentially. Simple symbols are not related to the variation display mode of normal decorative symbols or alternative symbols, and display a constant variation from the start of variation to the end of the variation of special symbols, and when they are stopped, they are related to the stop display mode of normal decorative symbols. may be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be one that at least gives a hint that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol, and can be changed as appropriate, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be called a "sub-decorative design", "sub-decoration design", "mini-decoration design", "mini-decoration design", etc. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern may be used, which shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern using a light emitting mode such as an LED. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during fluctuation of special symbols, display of results) when a malfunction occurs in the performance display device 60, etc. As an example of the display mode of the 4th symbol, the LED lights up sequentially in "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including turning off is also possible). The variable display may be displayed in a variable manner, or the variable display may be indicated by flashing in a certain single color depending on the type of special symbol, and the type of loss or jackpot may be indicated by the emitted color when the display is stopped.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for gaming. The clocking means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time since the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit with a built-in battery that can continue to measure date and time even when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off or during a power outage may also be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be slight differences in the time between each gaming machine due to individual differences or time differences, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, there is no difference in time between multiple gaming machines as long as the power is turned on at the same time. The possibility of this occurring is small.

The performance determining means 303 executes a synchronized performance that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized performance is a performance that is displayed on the performance display device 60 in a synchronized performance period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of symbol fluctuations and the gaming state. The synchronized performance period lasts several minutes, is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include multiple symbol variation periods. The performance pattern of the synchronized performance is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the performance pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

The synchronized performance is executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal game or a special game. Here, "during normal gaming" also includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. In other words, "normal game" includes (1) "normal game during fluctuating display" where symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and (2) "normal game while fluctuating is stopped" when symbols are not fluctuating and the standby demo screen is not being displayed. '', and (3) ``Normal game while displaying a standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the changing symbols being displayed. The synchronization performance can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode that controls volume reduction, brightness reduction, etc. in the synchronization performance is (1). It may be different from when. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information regarding the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the production button 109 or the cross key 110, and when this operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronized production will be output. This will be suppressed, and priority will be given to screen displays such as performance customization using the mobile cooperation system.

The synchronized performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined music performance or video is played back at a predetermined time (referred to as a "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronization effect may be a time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour on the hour or half past the hour with reference to standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time may be set that can vary depending on the date or day of the week, and instead of being set at regular intervals such as "every hour," the time may be set at different intervals, such as first after one hour, then after three hours, and so on. The interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game store clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronized performance is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification in which the timing is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, a plurality of machines at a game parlor are turned on at the same time. As a result, once the predetermined time has elapsed, the same synchronized performance is executed at the same time on the plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same songs and videos are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect can be obtained.

The synchronized performance function is similarly built into other game machines of the same model, and multiple game machines on the same game island are powered on at the same time by game store staff every day. Then, all of the plurality of gaming machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronized performance start time almost at the same time, and can execute the synchronized performance at the same time. This is called multi-device synchronized production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized on multiple devices, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized on multiple devices. It increases.

The performance setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of performance results. The game result history is the result of the game that leads to the ball that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of balls hit, the number of prize balls, the number of jackpots, the number of probability changes, and the number of time savings. The history of performance results is different from gaming profits, and is a performance record that is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as being granted the right to change the content and type of the performance, or the right to make it easier for a specific type of performance to appear. This is information such as scores. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined performance, the result of a mini-game, etc. and give it to the player, encoded information, such as a two-dimensional code, indicating the score and game history is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his or her mobile terminal, the points obtained through decoding and information on the game history are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A system for linking a gaming machine and a player's mobile terminal via a two-dimensional code will be described later. Note that the points mentioned here are necessary to expand the range of production customization described below, and the points must reach a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.) This is a specification that will increase the number of customizable items.

The performance setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of performance content options as performance customization based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, as performance patterns to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters, and songs to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. That's it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern is to be displayed. In those cases, when a player's operation of the effect button 109 or cross key 110 is accepted while the standby demo screen is displayed, and a effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected effect. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial process execution means 360 executes a control start process for the sub-board 300 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or recovered from a power-off. The sub-power-off processing execution unit 362 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing on the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power-off, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as a power-off process.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, a player registers as a user in advance by setting an account and password on a game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site using a mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays on the screen of the performance display device 60 a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of a mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") that encodes the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the input screen for the password information on the effect display device 60, and allows the player to input the password information through button operations such as the cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the performance setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and performance score history, the game content and performance score status of the player up to the previous time can be inherited. Input of this password information becomes an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start performance customization for selecting various performance elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and performance progresses, the performance setting means 308 adds up the points given to the player as performance benefits from time to time and accumulates them as performance score history. You can perform performance customization at any time and select and set your favorite elements as various performance elements. Points for performance are basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the expectation of transition to a special game, the higher the score is awarded to the type of performance, and the higher the score is also awarded when transition to the special game.

To customize the performance, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and depending on the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that make up the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 You can change the performance elements such as music to your liking. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements in accordance with the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable performance element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is provided. When the player operates a button to instruct the end of the game or performance customization, the performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and uses this to control the performance display. The means 305 displays it on the effect display device 60. The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his or her mobile terminal and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to obtain information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 with a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with the player's own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and performance can be carried over to the next game. Also, by continuing to play the game for a long time, points can be earned as the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increases.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling overall gaming operations. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Entry signals from each ball entrance, payout signals from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning hole solenoid, the first special symbol display section 41, and the second special symbol display section 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the results of the lottery, the results of determining symbols, and the results of determining fluctuation patterns. Signals are transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte command type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte command content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating command type data and command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data.When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that it is instruction type data; When the bit is 0, it indicates instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is designed to send 1 byte of data per data transmission, so two transmissions of 1 byte each are required to send 2 bytes of command data. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in a row by the sub board 300, completion of the transmission and reception of that data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in a row, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and a production control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means that holds a sub control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and the like. A sub-control program including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and performance control based on the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the production button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 using the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , controls the performance through audio output, lamp lighting, and character object movements. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to production control device 313. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the sub-board 300 includes the production control device 313, but the sub-board 300 and the production control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but can be separated and connected to each other. It may also be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device 313. The production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means that holds material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a compressed state. The performance image data is an image used for fluctuating display or performance display as a performance object indicating the judgment result of a winning/failure lottery, etc. For example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for a preview performance, a sprite image used for various performances, etc. This is a material image such as a video to be used. The motion data is data that defines an action when adding an action-like action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and characters' lines that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure comprehensively represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, or as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing or image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and stores the generated display image in a frame buffer as a frame of a moving image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory that temporarily stores frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

Note that the data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be called "schematic display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the general display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of effect display processes, such as the start and stop timing of fluctuation of decorative patterns, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the playback start and stop timing. . On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display controls such as the display order of sprite images to realize fluctuating display of decorative patterns and the display processing order in frame units to display moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the production control device 313 reads "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. and execute display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the production control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and are simply "display pattern data". ”. For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In addition, in the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modification, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the production control device 313 may execute the processing executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also serve as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the production control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included, and in this case, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. may be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a production control device 313 in addition to a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, and a sub-ROM 312. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the production control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing executed by the production control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may serve as the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may serve as the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the production control device 313 is not included, and in this case, the processing to be executed by the production control device 313 is executed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312. It's okay.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the main board 200 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution unit 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings regarding the hardware such as setting the built-in registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S122), a setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N at S122), a setting confirmation process is executed (S126). Note that if the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes in S122 to S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, a power-off recovery process or an initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power-off recovery is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on, or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N at S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing had completed normally when the power was last turned off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 will have been stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 will use the checksum to Inspect the data in main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is executed to return to the state before the power was turned off (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and initial settings for various errors and communication initial settings with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Subsequently, the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared, and commands for various information indicating the gaming status are requested to be sent. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big winning port 20 are returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared with 0, and the initial settings of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process to be described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) from then on, and the interrupt processing described later is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When using "1" to "6" as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the process moves to a setting change state (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N at S140), the process at S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N at S144), the processes from S138 to S142 are repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden to make the set value invisible (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. A transition is made to a setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key turns OFF (Y in S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. The setting value is made invisible (S162), and the process returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power-off (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power-off memory is executed by inputting an unconditional interrupt request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, the process advances to S212. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol, Initial value random number update processing is executed (S208), timer interrupt is enabled (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are disabled (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, and then interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed.

When a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power-off information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power-off information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to check the backed up data in the main RAM 291 when the power is turned on next time, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. Note that the above-mentioned processing at the time of power-off is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, interrupt operating conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd start opening valid period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), big prize opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game state display processing (S340), handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and returns.

In the input processing (S304), the input port data of switches attached to the game board surface, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, door/frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal is monitored. , creates data indicating the input state and stores it in the main RAM 291. Note that the data indicating this input state includes level data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt, and data at the input port at the time of the previous interrupt). (data indicating which switch was found to have changed by comparing input port data using exclusive OR).

In various random number updating processes (S306), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers and the fluctuation pattern random numbers are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Further, a fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The respective random number values, maximum values, and initial values are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number values are incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. Further, if the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the random number range is completed once. Then, new initial values are set and random numbers are generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the initial value random number is set to 0. Similar processing is performed in the initial value random number update processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second starting port 12 is set. The second starting port 12 contains a validity period during which a prize ball will be paid out and a lottery related to the second special symbol will be executed when a game ball enters, and a valid period during which a prize ball will be paid out and a second special symbol will be drawn even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set in which a lottery related to a symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting port monitoring control process (S326), the second starting port winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting port 12, so no game ball enters the second starting port 12. Even if the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where a valid period and an invalid period are set for the first starting hole 11, the big winning hole 20, the first operating hole 31, the second operating hole 32, the general winning hole 33, etc. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory in operation" and the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is not 0, the second starting port valid period flag indicates that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period. If the value of the second starting port validity extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in an invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the winning monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch does not have an invalid period or is currently in its valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, sending command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting data received from the payout control board 155. Execute in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. At this time, if the number of pending normal symbols is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of pending normal symbols is updated and the random number related to the normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, processing related to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol fluctuating", the normal symbol fluctuating process is executed, and if the state is "normal symbol stopping symbol displaying", the normal symbol stopping symbol displaying process is executed, and the "normal symbol changing state" is executed. If "accessory object is in operation", normal electric accessory object operation process is executed, and if "normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration is in progress", normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has ended, the normal symbol fluctuation stop setting is executed and the state of the normal symbol is changed to " Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol display". In normal pattern stop pattern display processing, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern has ended, the normal pattern operation end setting corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In case of a hit, set the state of the normal symbol to "Normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory release extension function when the normal electric accessory starts operating, and start the normal electric accessory. The operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of a miss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change." In the normal electric accessory operation process, if the winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball are monitored and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. executes the operation termination setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. If it is determined that the number of prizes in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance to the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 When the opening/closing of the entrance of the prize opening is set and it is determined that the opening of the entrance of the series of ordinary electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation termination setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the activation of the second starting opening are performed. Execute extension time settings. In addition, if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration processing, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has ended, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". "Waiting for change".

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol variation" and the value of the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is started. It is decided to start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is decremented, and the hit judgment, determination of the stop symbol, setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. . After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol fluctuating", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the normal symbol state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting hole monitoring control process (S326), winnings of the first starting hole 11 and second starting hole 12 of the game balls are monitored. If you confirm that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, obtain a built-in random number, and add the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the obtained built-in random number. It is stored in a buffer as a special symbol per random number used in jackpot determination. Further, as random numbers related to special symbols, symbol random numbers and fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired and stored. If the reservation of the second special symbol is to be extinguished in priority to the reservation of the first special symbol, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed, but if the reservation of the special symbol is to be consumed in the order of winning, In addition to updating the reservations related to the winnings, the total number of reservations is updated and the order of winnings is stored. Next, in order to request a preview production command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting slot, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is the command transmission period, a winning preview production request, a winning symbol preview production request, a pattern notice Executes performance requests in order. Here, (1) if you want to store the random number related to the first special symbol while you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated, (2) you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated. When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not activated, (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the jackpot or small win. , it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls for special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four pieces of preliminary determination information (prior propriety determination information, preliminary symbol determination information, preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of commands for preliminary determination processing, but in another example, when a ball enters the starting hole, the commands are uniformly transmitted and pre-reading is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various situational judgments such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is As in the case, the second starting opening winnings monitoring process is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting port winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, if it is confirmed that a game ball has won a prize when the number of pending balls is 0, the number of pending balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), a hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is ended. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general processing is ended, and if it is "starting to change", the special symbol is changed. A start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", special symbol varying processing is executed, and if "special symbol stopping symbol is being displayed", special symbol stopping symbol displaying processing is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the variation is started in order to start the effect display on the sub board 300. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation patterns, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "Special symbol variation in progress," and clear the variation pattern judgment area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern to 0. . In the process during special symbol fluctuation, after performing special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has ended, the special symbol fluctuation stop setting is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to ``Symbols are stopped and symbols are being displayed.'' In special symbol stop symbol display processing, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, special symbol operation end setting is executed corresponding to the result of hit determination. In the case of a jackpot, in order to end the special symbol's operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the number of times the special electric accessory will operate continuously, and set the special symbol's probability. Disable the variation function, special symbol variation time reduction function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function to prepare the state of the gaming machine for opening the big winning hole. Set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo performance, and command request for firing position specification performance (command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended firing position such as "Right hit") Execute. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine to the small hit start demonstration, set the win start demo display time, and set the win start demonstration performance. Execute command requests and command requests for firing position designation effects. If the result of the hit judgment is a failure, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol is changed. To end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol variation" and a command request for firing position designation performance is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and whether the condition device is in operation or the special electric accessory is in operation. If it is determined that this is the case, processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, processing in preparation for opening the big winning opening, processing while the special electric accessory is in operation, processing while closing the big winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, and small winning special call. Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of small winning large winning opening, and processing during small winning end demonstration.

In the grand prize opening validity period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of determining the validity period of the major prize opening 20, if the value of the major prize opening validity period is 0, the great prize opening validity period flag is set to If it is other than 0, the big winning opening valid period data is stored in the big winning opening valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored and it is determined whether the special symbol is in a state where variation can start. If the order of consumption of the reserved balls of the special symbol is priority consumption of the second special symbol, (1) the jackpot or small hit is not in progress, (2) the first special symbol is on standby for fluctuation, (3) ) The second special symbol is on standby to fluctuate, and (4) the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is other than 0. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the special symbol is ready to start fluctuating. It is determined that If the reserved balls of the special symbol are consumed in the order of winning, in addition to (1) to (3) above, (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, and (6) the relevant When all of the following conditions are satisfied: the determination matches the order of consumption, that is, the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol is ready to start changing, the number of pending balls of the special symbol is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, a hit determination for the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, decide on the pattern. In determining the symbols, if the hit judgment is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the special symbol per symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small win symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined. is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the operation content of the special symbol probability fluctuation function is determined. The game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operating details of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Next, settings are made during the jackpot, such as the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession and the opening time of the jackpot. Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection state are set by selecting a variation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set by referring to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, select the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, set the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state, set the start demo time and end demo time, and confirm the winning. The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame open signal, and determines whether there is a change in the error state. If so, the error state is stored and a request is made to the sub-board 300 to display an error state representation of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled depending on the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display the error state performance is not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and calculates the continuous on time ( For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that is incremented for each interrupt when the switch is on is an abnormal value, the incoming ball transit time abnormal setting, command transmission request, and security output to the external information output terminal 160 are determined to be abnormal. Step through the creation of output requests. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the abnormality in the entrance and passage time. If it is determined that the continuous on time is not abnormal, no security output request is created.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of consecutive activations of the special electric accessory, the error state, the number of pending activation balls for normal symbols, and the number of pending activation balls for special symbols, each display is required. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), the handle state is inspected to monitor the touch state of the handle, and if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is Updates, sets the handle state monitoring timer, and requests command transmission for handle state presentation. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, a handle state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for special symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, the display of the game status, and the special electric accessory are displayed in succession. Initialize the display in order to display the number of times the special electric accessory is activated, display the operating status of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated, display the division, display the error, and display the prize ball ratio. , acquire and output display data in sequence.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting firing of game balls, setting of prohibiting/permitting firing corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the big winning hole solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the big winning hole solenoid 92 is acquired. Executes acquisition and output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the production control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a request to send a command to be sent to the sub-board 300 is checked, and if it is determined that there is a request to send a command, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used on the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a normal symbol variation pattern random number as random numbers related to the normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as the random number related to the special symbol. , soft random numbers per special symbol, random symbol numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the initial value random number per special symbol are used as random numbers to give the initial values of the initial value update type random numbers. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers for each special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending normal symbol fluctuations when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and stop symbol determination when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) to start the variation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to suspend the normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is determined in the start opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won when the number of balls pending operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , the value of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the generated value is generated by adding the two values, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per random number is used to execute the jackpot determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326) that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). is acquired from a predetermined location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is stored in a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a game ball has won when the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). The information is acquired from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have values in the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are set as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the special random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). When updating the soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt processing is executed at fixed time intervals by a timer interrupt, various random number update processing (S306) and initial value update type random number update processing (S308) included in the interrupt processing are also executed at fixed time intervals. Ru. That is, the random number per normal symbol, the random number in the normal symbol variation pattern, the random number in each special symbol, the soft random number in each special symbol, the random number in the symbol per special symbol, and the random number in the variation pattern are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, the main process (S120) takes the time from the end of the interrupt process until the next timer interrupt occurs, that is, from the fixed time measured by the timer to the time required for the interrupt process. It will be repeated for the reduced time. The time required for interrupt processing differs depending on the gaming state, etc., so the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is different from various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. Thereby, the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the sub-board 300 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initial process execution unit 360. When control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs functions such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310. Initial settings regarding hardware are executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and among the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. By doing so, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 is executed with the highest priority, and includes processing at power-on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled. The next highest priority level 7 interrupt process is command processing received from the main board 200, and the second highest priority level 3 interrupt process is CPU runaway detection using a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority level 2 interrupt process is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, motors, etc. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts with the highest priority, which is preset for each type of interrupt, are executed first. Note that the processing shown in this figure includes the processing at power startup, which is an interrupt with the highest priority level, the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected, which is an interrupt with priority level 3. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for the model is set from all error information for all models stored in advance (S512). . All the lamps including the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the process does not return to this flow from the main process of S518, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. 20 is correctly placed in the main process of this figure, the start address at which to start the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent process. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of missing decorative patterns becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is updated. (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in a method that uses a counter to determine the missing decorative symbols, in the case of a method that uses a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations that result in missing symbols to determine the missing decorative symbols. The process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed in S552 when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state, and when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the production button 109 (S546), A preview lottery is executed (S548). In addition, in the preview lottery in S548, in order to send the command for the preview performance to appear immediately after the start of symbol variation to the production control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and a preview effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol variation is drawn by lottery in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command has just been analyzed, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y in S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for lottery is updated as a low priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation production pattern of the decorative symbol is determined in this process of S552, and if the command to be analyzed indicates a stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is If the method is to use the method of determining the missing decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the second highest priority after reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command becomes the first command. (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. In this way, by acquiring a hard random number each time there is an interruption of a main command from the main board 200, periodicity does not occur in the timing of acquiring random numbers, and the randomness of the values is increased. If the data read in S600 do not match twice in a row (can be read up to 5 times), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data The command write pointer, which is the read position in the ring buffer (for ring buffer), is acquired (S610), and the first command and second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, steps S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608) and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting commands related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that transmission of the command data to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that the command has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628) and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N at S622), the process skips S624 and subsequent steps and returns to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been successfully received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), the command is stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for controlling lamps such as the decorative lamp 111, controlling the solenoids and motors that drive the movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and occurs at a cycle of 1 ms. Since this is an interrupt with priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power outage are generated. , processes the input/output of a port that inputs/outputs a drive signal, etc. to a controlled device such as a motor or a solenoid (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power outage is input, the process immediately moves to backup processing. Data related to device control, such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to ports in S642, is updated (S644), and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. (S646), updates the timer for managing the valid input time of the production button 109 (S648), and updates the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. A 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

Note that the minimum unit for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of that as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, lamp control and image display control can be easily synchronized. Furthermore, when counting a relatively long period of time, such as a 30 second error notification, if one interrupt (1 ms) period is used, the count value will become longer than necessary; The count value can also be shortened by setting it as a cycle count value.

There are 16 types of tasks in the task control, processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts (S652). By doing so, monitoring at an 8ms cycle is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is inverted on and off every frame, and if this toggle signal remains the same value for 1600 ms continuously, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 The control CPU 320 transmits a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes the reset. Since a toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period, such as the above-mentioned error notification for 30 seconds, is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the timeout expires.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. If the second winning lottery value is on hold (Y in S700), the second winning/failure determining means 222 reads out the second winning lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and The determining means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a fluctuation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second winning/failure lottery value is not held (N at S700) and the first winning/failure drawing value is held (Y at S708), the first winning/failure determining means 221 selects the first winning/failure drawing. The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the validity of the first special symbol 51 (S710). A variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is sent to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

Process the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol (S718), repeat S718 until a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed and the symbol display stop timing is reached (S720 N), and after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol display will stop. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and end the special symbol fluctuation display. do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the content of effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative pattern according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and validity determination result. A mode is determined (S752), and a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the precursor setting is turned on by advance determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable performance pattern is a pattern that includes specific performance content that should be avoided from being displayed overlapping with the preview performance. If not (S758, N), and if the symbol change is not the trigger for turning on the omen setting (S760, N), the setting to display a predetermined preview effect is executed (S764), and the omen setting is turned on. If it is the symbol change that was turned on (Y in S760), the omen setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N at S756) or if the variable performance pattern includes specific performance content (Y at S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Thereafter, the display of the decorative pattern variation effect is started (S766), the process of displaying the variation effect of the decorative pattern (S768), and the display process of the preview effect (S770), until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when a fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined in S752, thereby stopping the symbol fluctuation display (S774). ), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is ended (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( (Y in S804), although the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), if the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the grand prize opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect is displayed. The control means 305 ends the production process of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, time saving, easy entry state (S818) ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the big prize opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), close the big prize opening 20 (S824), and if the set number of openings and closings have not been completed (N in S826), add 1 to the number of openings and closings and return to S820. (S828), if the set number of openings and closings have been completed (Y in S826), the small winning game ends.

In the underlying technology, there are generally more jackpot balls in the second game than jackpot balls in the first game, that is, one jackpot in the second game than in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning prize balls than the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of prize ball acquisition in the first game and the second game are approximately equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special games executed in the first game and the special games executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 7 times with a 100% probability, and in the second game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 4 times with a 50% probability. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. In addition, in any case, a specific area is provided in the grand prize opening, and if the game ball that enters the grand prize opening enters or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends. It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is performed. In this case, the special game that is executed when a jackpot is achieved in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game that is executed when the jackpot is achieved in the first game. may be configured so that the probability that the normal game with variable probability is executed after the special game is high is high. For example, a first win in which a special game is executed that makes it relatively difficult for the ball to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area. The second game may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second win than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of winning the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Example)
<Small hit rush>
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, a so-called small win rush, which is a game state in which the number of small win games per unit time increases, that is, the frequency of occurrence of small wins increases, can be executed. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine has a parallel specification in which (1) the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be changed simultaneously in parallel, and (2) the small hit probability in the second lottery is set to be relatively high (for example, the small win probability in the first win/fail lottery is lower than the small win probability in the second win/fail lottery, or there is no possibility of a small win), and (3) a specific gaming state. This is a specification that increases the fluctuating efficiency of the second special symbol 52.

The specific gaming state (3) above is, for example, a gaming state in which the probability fluctuates and the ball enters normally. Here, the states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 12 include a normal ball entry state (hereinafter also referred to as a "low base state") in which ball entry is relatively low, and a normal ball entry state where the ball enters the ball more easily than the normal entry state. There is an easy-to-enter state (hereinafter also referred to as a "high base state") in which the ball is highly easy to pitch. A normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as There is a variable probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state") in which the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than the normal probability state (also referred to as a "low probability state"). In this embodiment, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is increased in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state (hereinafter also referred to as "high probability low base state"). Note that the "easy entry state" is a state in which the probability of winning the opening lottery of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called "electric tulip") is relatively high, and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 at the time of winning the opening lottery. This is one or more of the following: a state in which the time is relatively long, and a state in which the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short; in this example, all three states are present. refers to In a modified example, one or two of these three conditions may not be satisfied. On the other hand, the normal ball entry state is a state in which the winning probability of the open lottery, the length of the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90, and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are reversed in the ball entry easy state. That is, a state in which the winning probability of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the opening lottery is relatively low, a condition in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 at the time of winning the opening lottery is relatively short, and a state in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set. This is a state in which one or more of the relatively elongated states have been reached, and in this embodiment, it refers to a state in which all three of these states have been transitioned. In a modified example, one or two of these three conditions may not be satisfied.

The pachinko game machine in this embodiment has a specification that increases the payout rate (so-called "machine rate") in the high probability low base state to 1 or more by frequently generating small wins in the second win/fail lottery. For example, if 100 balls can be fired per minute, continuous firing (1 If you fire 100 balls per minute), if you fire 100 balls per minute, the expected value of small winning games in 1 minute (average number of small winning games executed per minute) is 0.1 times ( As an example, if a small win is won once every 10 minutes, then the expected value of prize balls to be won in a small win game in 1 minute is 2 (for example, the expected value of prize balls won per count of the big prize hole). Since the number is 10 and the average number of winnings per small winning game is 2.0, it is 0.1 x 10 x 2.0 = 2), and only the prize balls acquired from small winning games are considered. (In other words, prize balls won by winning in the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 33, etc. are not considered) The ball output rate is 0.02. On the other hand, when the probability fluctuates and the ball enters normally (high probability low base state), if you fire continuously into the second starting port 12 (fire at a pace of 100 balls per minute), 100 balls per minute. If the expected value of small winning games in 1 minute (average number of small winning games occurring in 1 minute) is 6.0 for the launch of , then the prize ball obtained in small winning games in 1 minute The expected value is 120 pieces (for example, the number of prize balls per one count of big winning opening is 10 pieces, and the average number of winning balls per small winning game is 2.0 pieces, so 6 x 10 x 2.0 = 120 pieces) The ball output rate is 1 considering only the prize balls acquired through small winning games (that is, the prize balls acquired by winning in the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 33, etc. are not considered). .2. The small hit rush ends when the high probability low base state shifts to another gaming state triggered by the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot. As a modified example, a specification of the number-of-times-cutting definite change (so-called "ST") is adopted, and the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol 52 are changed without transitioning to the special game during the high probability low base state. The small win rush may be configured to end by transitioning to a low probability low base state when the total reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

This embodiment proposes suitable control and performance in a pachinko game machine equipped with a small win rush. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or correspond to elements constituting the Pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, contents that have already been explained in the basic technology will be omitted as appropriate, and mainly contents that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the basic technology will be explained.

FIG. 30 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the embodiment. In the flow path on the right side of the game area 81, in other words, in the flow path through which game balls shot with relatively strong strength flow, the operating port 506, the second starting port 12, and the big prize port 20 are arranged in order from the top. be done. The operating port 506 corresponds to the second operating port 32 in the base technology. Unlike the base technology, the operating port of this embodiment is provided only in the right channel in the game area 81, and the first operating port 31 is not provided in the left channel. The passage detection device 508 corresponds to the second passage detection device 37 in the base technology.

When the game ball passes through the operating port 506, a normal symbol lottery (open lottery) is executed, and if the lottery result is a win, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. When the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded, most of the game balls flowing through the right channel of the game area 81 will easily enter the second starting port 12. On the other hand, the expanded normal electric accessory 90 covers and obstructs the flow path toward the grand prize opening 20, making it difficult for the game ball to flow downstream of the second starting opening 12, and as a result, the ball does not enter the grand prize opening 20. It becomes difficult to do. That is, the positional relationship between the second starting port 12 and the big winning hole 20 is such that the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole 20 when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded is different from the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole 20 when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. The positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole 20 is lower than when the ball is not played. Therefore, in the ball entry easy state (high base state) where the frequency of opening of the normal electric accessory 90 increases, the possibility of a ball entering the big winning hole 20 is lower than in the normal ball entry state (low base state). A game nail (not shown) is provided above the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 so that it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting port 12 when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is closed. Accordingly, when the normal electric accessory 90 is closed, the game ball easily flows downstream of the second starting opening 12, and the possibility of the ball entering the big winning opening 20 is relatively increased.

FIG. 31 is a functional block diagram showing the specific game control means in FIG. 4 in detail. The specific game control means 270 includes a ball entering state setting means 510 and a probability state setting means 512. Ball entry state setting means 510 sets the game state to either a normal ball entry state or an easy ball entry state. The ball entry state setting means 510 sets the game state to switch from the normal ball entry state to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, and changes the game state from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state when the end of the easy ball entry state is reached. Set to switch the gaming state. More specifically, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol 51 is a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol or a 4R probability variable jackpot symbol when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot is a low probability low base state, the game is entered after the end of the special game. The game state is switched to the ball easy state and the ball easy state is maintained until the next jackpot. In addition, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol 51 is the 4R normal jackpot symbol, the game state is switched to the easy-to-enter state after the special game ends, and when the number of symbol changes reaches 50, it is easy to enter the ball. Switch the game state from the normal ball entering state. In addition, while a special game is being executed, the ball is always in the normal ball entry state (during the special game that is executed when the result of the judgment of jackpot in the normal ball entry state is the normal ball entry state), and the small winning game is executed. Medium takes over the game state immediately before the start of the small winning game (during the small winning game, which is executed when the result of the judgment in the normal ball entering state is a small winning, is the normal ball entering state).

If the game state at the time of a jackpot is a high probability high base state or a high probability low base state and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol 52 is a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol or a 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, the game will be entered after the end of the special game. The game state is switched to the ball easy state and the ball easy state is maintained until the next jackpot. In addition, if the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol 52 is the 2R normal jackpot symbol, the game state is switched to the easy entry state after the special game ends, and when the number of symbol changes reaches 50, the entry is easy. Switch the game state from the normal ball entering state. Note that if the second special symbol 52 is a 2R probability-variable jackpot symbol, the state does not shift to the easy entry state. In addition, while a special game is being executed, the ball is always in the normal ball entry state (during the special game that is executed when the result of the jackpot in the easy ball entry state is a jackpot, the ball is in the normal ball entry state), and the small winning game is executed. In the middle, the game state immediately before the start of the small winning game is inherited (during the small winning game, which is executed when the result of the judgment in the easy ball entering state is a small winning, it is in the easy ball entering state).

The probability state setting means 512 sets the gaming state to either a normal probability state or a probability variable state. The probability state setting means 512 sets the gaming state to a probability fluctuation state after the end of the special game when a jackpot with a probability change transition occurs, and sets the game state to a probability fluctuation state after the special game ends, and when a jackpot without a probability change transition occurs, the probability state setting means 512 sets the game state to the probability fluctuation state after the special game ends. After the game ends, the game state is set to the normal probability state. Note that during the execution of a special game, the normal probability state is always set (during the special game that is executed when the result of the winning/failure judgment in the normal ball entry state is a jackpot, the normal probability state is set, and in the easy ball entry state, the winning/failure judgment is not During the special game that is executed when the result is a jackpot, it is also in the normal probability state), and during the execution of the small win game, the gaming state immediately before the start of the small win game is inherited (in the normal probability state, the result of the judgment is a small win) During the small winning game that is executed when , the ball is in the normal probability state, and when the result of the winning/failure determination is a small winning in the easy ball entry state, the small winning game that is executed is in the easy ball entry state).

FIG. 32 schematically shows a symbol determination table to be referred to in case of a jackpot. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 refer to the jackpot symbol determination table of this figure when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, and determine the stopping mode of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. Determine. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a stop symbol indicating any one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 4R normal, 2R probability variation, and 2R normal as the jackpot symbol. The stop symbols that can be selected are different between the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The first symbol determining means 226 selects a stop symbol indicating any one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal as the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51. The second symbol determining means 227 selects a stop symbol indicating any one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 2R probability variation, and 2R normal as the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52.

In the table of FIG. 32, selection probabilities are set by assigning lottery values in different ranges to each type of stopped symbol. In the case of the first special symbol 51, when the lottery value is 0 to 24, 10R probability variation is selected (selection probability is approximately 10%), and when the lottery value is 25 to 204, 4R probability variation is selected (selection probability is approximately 70%), 4R normal is selected when the lottery value is between 205 and 255 (selection probability is approximately 20%). In the case of the second special symbol 52, 10R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 0 to 89 (selection probability is approximately 35%), and 4R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 90 to 165 (selection probability is approximately 30%), 2R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 166 to 204 (selection probability is approximately 15%), and 2R normal is selected when the lottery value is 205 to 255 (selection probability is approximately 20%) .

FIG. 33 is a game state transition diagram schematically showing the relationship between each game state and transition trigger. In the low probability low base state 620, the main special symbol is the first special symbol 51, and the starting opening that the player aims at is the first starting opening 11. When a so-called first hit occurs in the low probability low base state 620, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the state transitions to a high probability high base state 624 (S900), and if it is a 4R normal jackpot, a low probability high Transition to the base state 622 (S902). In the low probability high base state 622, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting opening that the player aims at is the second starting opening 12. When a jackpot occurs in the low probability high base state 622, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the state transitions to the high probability high base state 624 (S904), and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, the low probability high base state is entered again. It becomes the state 622 (S906), and if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, it changes to the high probability low base state 626 (S905). If the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50 times, which is the final stage of the easy entry state, without a jackpot occurring in the low probability high base state 622, a transition is made to the low probability low base state 620 (S908).

In the high probability high base state 624, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting opening that the player aims at is the second starting opening 12. In the high probability high base state 624, a so-called battle performance is executed, in which an image of a battle between predetermined characters (an ally character and a strong enemy character) is displayed. In this production mode, until the result of the judgment becomes a jackpot (in other words, in the case of a small hit and a miss), the ally character runs at a sprint and suggests the expectation of a jackpot (or the expectation of a probability-variable jackpot). If the result of the judgment is a jackpot, a preview performance indicating the expected level of jackpot (or the expected level of probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and then the battle performance is executed. In the battle performance, a battle between characters is displayed to encourage whether or not there will be a jackpot that will lead to a special game with a higher profit, and if an ally character wins, the number of unit games will be relatively large. A 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, which is a jackpot with a large profit, occurs, and when an ally character is defeated, a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, which is a jackpot with a relatively small number of unit games and a small profit, occurs. In FIG. 33, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, the state returns to the high probability high base state 624 (S910), and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, the state transitions to the low probability high base state 622 (S912), and the 2R probability variation jackpot returns to the high probability high base state 624 (S910). If it is a jackpot, a transition is made to the high probability low base state 626 (S914). The high probability high base state 624 continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In the high probability low base state 626, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting opening that the player aims at is the second starting opening 12. The high probability low base state 626 occurs when the player is defeated in the battle production in the high probability high base state 624 (2R
In this embodiment, the game state is more advantageous than the high probability high base state 624 in which a small hit rush is executed. The production mode in the high probability low base state 626 is a production mode in which a production (details will be described later) in which you repeatedly fight a weak enemy character that is a different enemy character from the strong enemy character you fight in the battle production described above. becomes. In this performance mode, until the result of the success/failure determination becomes a jackpot, the result of the success/failure determination becomes a small hit, and a performance is executed in which weak enemy characters are defeated one after another. If so, a preview performance indicating the expectation level of a jackpot (or an expectation level of a probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and then the battle performance described above is executed. The high probability low base state 626 continues until the next jackpot occurs, and even if a small win occurs once or consecutively, the gaming state remains in the high probability low base state 626. When a jackpot occurs in the high probability low base state 626, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the transition is made to the high probability high base state 624 (S916), and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, the low probability high base state is entered. The state changes to 622 (S918), and if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the state returns to the high probability low base state 626 (S920).

FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the validity determination table in this embodiment. This table is referred to in place of the table in FIG. 5 in the underlying technology. The win/fail determination table of this embodiment is set so that the probability of a small win in the second win/fail lottery is relatively high. That is, the configuration is such that the probability that the result of the judgment made by the second judgment means 222 is a small hit is higher than the probability that the result of the judgment made by the first judgment means 221 is a small hit. Alternatively, the result of the judgment made by the first judgment means 221 may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment made by the second judgment means 222 may be a small hit. For example, the lottery value range that corresponds to a small win is determined to be wider for the second win/fail lottery than for the first win/fail lottery (the lottery value range that corresponds to the small win for the first win/fail lottery does not need to exist, i.e. "0" is fine.) The small hit game control means 265 controls the small win game control means 265 when the result of the judgment by the second judgment means 222 is a small win, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222. If the result is a small win, a small win game with opening of the big prize opening 20 is executed.

As shown in the figure, in both the first winning/failure drawing by the first winning/failure judging means 221 and the second winning/failure drawing by the second winning/failure judging means 222, the winning/failure drawing values are 0 to 209 in normal times (that is, in a low probability state). It is a jackpot only when it falls within the range. At the time of probability change, the range of jackpot is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 209, but also when it falls within the range of 210 to 1299. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the gaming state. In addition, in this figure, the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability is shown using a single success/failure judgment table, but the success/failure judgment table may be prepared separately for normal and variable probability. It may be prepared separately for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery. If the win/fail lottery value obtained by the second win/fail judgment means 222 falls within the range of 1300 to 50899, it will be a small win, but if the win/fail draw value obtained by the first win/fail judgment means 221 falls within the range of 1300 to 50,899. Even if you do, it will not be a small hit, but a miss. Further, in both the first lottery by the first lottery by the first lottery by the first lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery, if the lottery value falls within the range of 50,900 to 65,535, the result is a loss. In this way, since the "small win" is associated only with the second lottery and not with the first lottery, it can only apply to the second lottery. In the embodiment, the probability of a small win in the second lottery is 1/1.32, while the probability of a small win in the first lottery is 0. The small winning probability of the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery is constant regardless of the game state. In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and the table for determining whether or not it is a small win are implemented in the form of a single success/failure determination table, but each may be implemented as separate tables. In addition, regarding the "small win", it may also be applicable in the first lottery, but in that case, the range of the lottery value is the range of the lottery value that is associated with the small win in the second lottery. set narrower. For example, the probability of a small win in the first lottery may be set to a low probability of about 1/400.

The probability that the result of the correctness determination corresponding to the ball entering the second starting port 12, that is, the result of the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52, will be a small hit is very high. Therefore, it is possible to consider a game method in which the game ball is always aimed at the second starting port 12 (that is, always hit to the right) and aims to obtain a small hit, but this is not the original gameplay intended by the designer. do not have. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 500, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state is made relatively low, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state is made relatively high. The fluctuation efficiency can be said to be the number of symbol fluctuations per predetermined unit time. In the embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol 52 per unit time is increased in the high probability low base state. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol according to one of a plurality of criteria. In the embodiment, the first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 according to a predetermined variation pattern table for the first special symbol 51.

The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines a fluctuation pattern that is determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state. Determine the variation pattern based on the table. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 10 minutes, for example, when the result of the second lottery is a loss in the low probability low base state. As a result, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 becomes relatively high in the high probability low base state, and becomes relatively low in the low probability low base state.

The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be determined as a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in a low probability low base state as a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in a high base state. A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern table. The high base state here includes a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. The high base state is a game state that is transferred after the end of the special game, and the next jackpot occurs or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 reaches a specific number of times, for example, 50 times. (As mentioned above, if the 10R probability variable jackpot symbol or the 4R probability variable jackpot symbol stops, it will continue until the next jackpot occurs). When the total number of fluctuations reaches a specific number, a transition is made to a low base state. In this way, in the high base state, which is the period from the end of the special game to the occurrence of the next jackpot or until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 increases, and the normal electric As a result of the accessory 90 being released with high frequency, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole 20 becomes low.

When the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 reaches 50 times, which is the final stage of the high base state, the ball entry state setting means 510 sets the ball entry state to the normal ball entry state. The ending period of the high base state is set to 50 times for the 4R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot, both of which are low probability states, so after the high base state ends, the low probability low base state will occur. When transitioning to the low probability low base state, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects a normal fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is likely to be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52. Determine a variation pattern based on selection criteria. On the other hand, only in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, after the special game ends, the game enters a high probability low base state and enters a small win rush state.

Generally, in a high base state, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as a variation pattern of a special symbol, and in a low base state, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as a variation pattern of a special symbol. easy to be However, in a high probability low base state that is a small hit rush, in order to increase the fluctuating efficiency of the second special symbol even in a low base state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively short fluctuation time. Patterns are more likely to be selected. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on a special fluctuation pattern table for an easy small hit rush. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects a very short fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 1 second, for example, when the result of the second lottery is a loss in a high probability low base state (small win rush).

On the premise of the above basic structure of the small hit rush, individual features will be explained below. In addition, points that differ from the basic configuration in the specifications of each embodiment will be explained as appropriate.

<First Example> Conditions for ending the easy ball entry state according to the game state In the high base state, it is assumed that the player hits the ball aiming at the second starting hole 12, which is what is called a right-handed hit. . In addition, in a high base state, the ball output rate (the ratio of the number of award balls won to the number of balls batted per given time) is unlikely to exceed 1 (i.e., the number of award balls won exceeds the number of balls batted). Therefore, it is conceivable to end the high base state, which is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball, as early as possible without prolonging it unnecessarily. For example, the occurrence of the next jackpot is one of the final stages of the easy-to-enter state, but by ending the easy-to-enter state at the start of the symbol fluctuation related to that jackpot, it is possible to By closing the electric accessory 90, it is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the second starting port 12 during symbol fluctuations, making it easier to avoid an unnecessarily high ball output rate. Such specifications result in a design that allows game machine developers to easily keep the ball payout rate within a suitable range.

However, when a player who is familiar with the specifications and characteristics of the gaming machine plays the game, since the normal electric accessory 90 is not released during the reach variation, the player can sense that the result of the judgment regarding the symbol variation is a jackpot. There is a possibility that it will be done. On the other hand, depending on the gaming state, the reach variation effect is executed only when the result of the judgment is a jackpot (for example, if the result of the judgment is a hit only in the high probability high base state 624, The reach variation performance is not executed and the battle performance described above is not developed, or the reach variation performance is executed and the battle performance described above is performed only when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a jackpot only in the high probability high base state 624. Specifications) may also be considered. Therefore, in the first embodiment, different conditions depending on the game state are used as the conditions for ending the easy ball entry state.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing the relationship between the state of symbol fluctuation and the end condition of the easy entry state. FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) show that the respective ending conditions are different in the two gaming states. In the first game state (FIG. 35(a)), which is one of the ball entry easy states, the ball entering state setting means 510 sets the result of the correctness judgment by the first correctness judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222. When it is a jackpot, the easy-to-enter state is terminated with the assumption that the termination condition is satisfied at the start of symbol variation related to the result of the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot. The first gaming state here is a high probability high base state 624. The upper row of FIG. 35(a) shows the state such as symbol fluctuation, and the lower row shows the on/off state of the ball entry easy state. First, after the super-shortening symbol fluctuations 630 and 632 are displayed with the easy-to-enter state turned on, when the jackpot reach fluctuation 634 is started (S930), the easy-to-enter state is turned off and ended. , until the subsequent special game 636 period, at least the normal ball entry state is maintained.

In the second game state (FIG. 35(b)), which is one of the easy-to-enter states and is a state different from the first game state, the first success/failure determination means 221 or the second success/failure determination means 222 When the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the easy-to-enter state is terminated as if the end condition is satisfied at the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the judgment. The second gaming state here is a low probability high base state 622. In FIG. 35(b), similarly to FIG. 35(a), the upper row shows the state such as symbol fluctuation, and the lower row shows the on/off state in which the ball enters easily. First, after super-shortening symbol fluctuations 640 and 642 are displayed with the ball entry easy state on, even if the jackpot reach variation 644 is started (S932), the ball entry easy state continues to be on. Thereafter, when the reach variation 644 is ended (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and ended, and the subsequent period of the special game 646 is in the normal ball entry state. In addition, when the reach variation of a miss is executed, the easy-to-ball state continues to be on even after the reach variation ends. In a modified example, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be the same gaming state, and for example, both may be a high probability high base state 624. In another modification, the timing when the easy ball entry state in the first game state is turned off is at the end of the reach variation 644 as shown in FIG. 35(b), and the easy ball entry state in the second game state is turned off. The timing of turning off may be the start of the reach variation 634 as shown in FIG. 35(a).

In the high probability high base state 624, the reach variation effect can be executed and the battle effect can be developed only when the result of the judgment is a jackpot. The validity determination here mainly refers to the validity determination by the second validity determination means 222, but may also include the validity determination by the first validity determination means 221. In the reach variation performance in the high probability high base state 624, the confirmation of a jackpot is suggested by the multiple decorative symbols becoming a reach mode, and in the remaining production, a battle is held to determine whether or not the jackpot involves a transition to the probability variation state. This will stimulate the players through the performance. The jackpot that occurs in the high-probability, high-base state 624 is a so-called consecutive jackpot, and the next jackpot is already guaranteed under the high-probability state, so the player's interest is not in the jackpot itself but in the subsequent jackpot. It can be said that it depends on whether or not you can win consecutively, that is, whether or not the next jackpot is likely to change. Therefore, even if the player knows that the jackpot has been determined at the start of the reach variation performance (reach variation 634) (S930), the player's sense of expectation is unlikely to be lost. In addition, since the confirmation of the jackpot is suggested at the start of the reach fluctuation effect or the time when the reach is established, in order to encourage the occurrence of the jackpot even before the start of the symbol fluctuation, so-called look-ahead is used to increase the possibility of the reach occurrence or the possibility of a certain variable jackpot. It may also be possible to perform a preview effect that suggests the following.

On the other hand, in the low probability high base state 622, the reach variation effect can be executed even when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from knowing whether or not there is a jackpot at the start point (S932) of the reach variation performance (reach variation 644) or during the symbol variation, the easy entry state is entered at the end of the symbol variation (S934). terminate. The validity determination here also mainly refers to the validity determination by the second validity determination means 222, but may also include the validity determination by the first validity determination means 221. When a reach variation effect is executed in the low probability high base state 622, a battle effect is developed in the same way as in the high probability high base state 624, but the easy entry state is ended at the start of this reach variation effect or during symbol variation. Never. As a modified example, when the reach variation effect is executed in the low probability high base state 622, the battle effect is not developed, and other effects (for example, a mission effect in which it is announced that it is a success and a jackpot if a treasure is found) etc.), and even in such a case, the easy entry state will not end at the start of the reach variation performance or during the symbol variation.

In the first embodiment, the first game may be executed preferentially so that the first game and the second game are not executed simultaneously at least in the high base state. That is, when displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner, the main display control means 250 waits for the variable display of the other, and at least when the timing to start variation is reached in the high base state. Even if the lottery value is held as the second hold, the first hold is extinguished, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51 is executed with priority. For example, if the easy entry state ends at the start of the jackpot symbol variation of the second special symbol, the ball will be hit aiming at the first starting port 11 instead of the second starting port 12, which makes it difficult for the electric accessory 90 to be released. It is also possible that As a result, there is a possibility that not only the second reservation but also the first reservation lottery value is reserved, but the main display control means 250 gives priority to the first reservation, and the first special symbol control means 251 displays the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. In this case, the frequency at which the second special symbol 52 changes, that is, the speed at which the second hold is consumed becomes slower, and the ball output rate in the second game in the high base state becomes difficult to exceed 1, so that the ball output rate is kept within an appropriate range. becomes easier to control.

The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 without reach is relatively long in the high probability high base state 624. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 without reach is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach. Also, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 without reach in the high base state is longer than the fluctuation time without reach of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state. It's okay. The variation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to become relatively long when the number of first holds reaches a predetermined number or more, or may be determined to become longer as the number of first holds increases. You may decide. Thereby, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of second retention becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a modified example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 is relatively short. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined such that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 without reach is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined such that the variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state where the reach is not reached and the variation time is shorter than the variation time when the first special symbol 51 is out of reach and in the low base state. The variation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to become relatively long when the number of first holds reaches a predetermined number or more, or may be determined to become longer as the number of first holds increases. You may. In this way, the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting opening 11, the faster the speed at which the second hold is extinguished, so the speed at which the second hold is used can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

However, the above-mentioned determination that the non-reach and miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not carried out in the high probability high base state 624 immediately after the so-called first hit, but in the high probability high base state during consecutive wins. It may also be implemented only in 624. That is, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the success/failure judgment by the first success/failure judgment means 221 or the second truth/failure judgment means 222 in the low probability low base state 620 is a jackpot, the subsequent high probability The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the off variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability base state 624. Immediately after the first win, there is a good possibility that the first reservation remains, and this is to avoid the game from stalling immediately after the first win. In addition, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot, in the high probability high base state 624, the first special symbol 51 The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long. As a further modification, the above-mentioned decision to make the non-reach and miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 relatively long is not implemented in the high probability high base state 624 during consecutive winnings, but instead in the high probability high probability state 624 immediately after the first hit. It may be performed only in the high base state 624. That is, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the success/failure judgment by the first success/failure judgment means 221 or the second truth/failure judgment means 222 is a jackpot, the high probability high base state 624 is shifted to the low probability low base state. It is relatively shorter than the off fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 in 620 is a jackpot. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the first special symbol 51 becomes the same. In this way, immediately after the first win where there is a good chance that the first hold is still left, it is possible to congratulate the transition to the high probability high base state 624, or to congratulate the transition to the high probability high base state 624. It is possible to secure the time for performing a special performance such as explaining the nature and content of the performance as a variable time.

As a modification, the first game and the second game may be executed in parallel at the same time. The main display control means 250 can display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner even when the second special symbol 52 is changing, and can display the second special symbol 52 even while the first special symbol 51 is changing. It can be displayed in a variable manner. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines the non-reach out fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 when the first pending number is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time is relatively long. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 without reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach and fluctuation regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the non-reachable fluctuation time. Further, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out variation time of the second special symbol 52. These also make it easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself, since the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the second retention speed is. As a further modification, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol when the number of first reserved symbols is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach and off variation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 that is out of reach and out of reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 that is out of reach and out of reach may be determined regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the variation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the non-reachable variation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first pending pieces is large in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 becomes shorter. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

As another modification, the main display control means 250 may be designed to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner, the main display control means 250 waits for the variable display of the other, and at the same time, when the timing for starting the variation of the second special symbol 52 has come. In this case, even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is executed with priority. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines that the second special symbol 52 has an off fluctuation time when the number of first pending pieces is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that it becomes relatively long. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 without reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach and fluctuation regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the non-reachable fluctuation time. Further, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out variation time of the second special symbol 52. These also make it easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself, since the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the second retention speed is. As a further modification, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol when the number of first reserved symbols is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is relatively short. For example, if the number of the first reserved symbols is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) ) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is set so that the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of first pending pieces is 0. Alternatively, the second special symbol 52 may be set such that the non-reach/miss variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the non-reach/miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of first reserved symbols. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the higher the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 without reach. A variation pattern may also be determined. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

As yet another modification, the main display control means 250 may be designed to execute the first game and the second game in the order of ball entry so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner, the main display control means 250 makes the other variable display standby, and when the ball enters the first starting port 11 and the second The order of entering the ball into the starting hole 12 or the order of the first suspension and the second suspension are stored, and the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is started in accordance with the order. In this case as well, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol 52 when the number of first reserved pieces is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 becomes relatively long. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 without reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach and fluctuation regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the non-reachable fluctuation time. Further, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out variation time of the second special symbol 52. These also make it easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself, since the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the second retention speed is. As a further modification, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol when the number of first reserved symbols is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is relatively short, for example, the number of the first reserved symbols is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined such that the variation time of the second special symbol 52 without reach is shorter than the variation time of non-reach with no reach of the second special symbol 52 when the number of first pending pieces is 0. Alternatively, the second special symbol 52 may be changed so that the non-reach/miss variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the non-reach/miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of first reserved pieces. A fluctuation pattern may be determined, and for example, the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 may be such that the higher the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 without reach. A pattern may be determined. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

In yet another modification, the end condition of the easy ball entry state is when the stop symbol fixing starts or the end of stop symbol fixing of the symbol fluctuation related to the result of the win/fail determination when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot. The easy-to-enter state may be terminated by assuming that the condition is satisfied. Here, "stop symbol fixation" is the period during which the fixed stop mode of the special symbol is maintained. For example, if there is a hold remaining, "stop symbol fixation" will start when the symbol is stopped due to symbol fluctuation, and After the "stop symbol fixation" continues for a predetermined time, the "stop symbol fixation" ends and the next symbol variation starts. Furthermore, if the result of the judgment is a small hit, the easy-to-enter state may be terminated as the end condition is satisfied at the start or end of the symbol variation related to the result of the judgment. The easy-to-enter state may be terminated by assuming that the termination condition is satisfied at the start or end of the start performance. Or, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, N seconds after the start of the pattern variation related to the result of the judgment (N may be a fixed value or a variable value depending on the jackpot pattern) The easy-to-enter state may be terminated by assuming that the termination condition is satisfied. Furthermore, each example regarding the termination condition of the easy entry state described above is not limited to the case where the first gaming state is the high probability high base state 624, but the first gaming state is the low probability low base state 620, the low probability Either the high base state 622 or the high probability low base state 626 may be applied. Furthermore, the second gaming state is not limited to the low probability high base state 622, but also whether the second gaming state is the low probability low base state 620, the high probability high base state 624, or the high probability low base state 626. It may be applied even if there is. Furthermore, the present invention may also be applied to a case where the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the same gaming state.

<Second Example> Conditions for ending the subsequent easy entry state according to the jackpot symbol Since the basic configuration of the second example is the same as that of the first example, the description of the common points will be omitted, and The explanation will focus on the differences from the example. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the end condition of the easy-to-enter state is based on a different end condition depending on the type of jackpot symbol, which is different depending on the type of gaming state.

If the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot, and the type of special symbol is the first jackpot symbol, the first condition is the end condition. A transition is made to a first game state which is an easy ball state. If the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot, and the type of special symbol is the second jackpot symbol, an entry with the second condition as the ending condition. A transition is made to a second game state which is an easy ball state. For example, the first jackpot symbol may be a jackpot symbol with a probability change, and the second jackpot symbol may be a jackpot symbol without a probability variation. For example, the first condition, which is one of the ending conditions, is the start of symbol fluctuation related to the result of the judgment when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, and the second condition, which is one of the ending conditions. The condition may be the end of symbol variation related to the result of the validity determination when the result of the validity determination is a jackpot. For example, the first gaming state may be a high probability high base state 624 and the second gaming state may be a low probability high base state 622, or the first gaming state may be a low probability high base state 622. , and the second gaming state may be a high probability high base state 624. Here, as a further modification to the above, (1) both the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol may be jackpot symbols with varying probability; in other words, any jackpot symbol has a high probability; In that case, the high-probability high base state 624, which is triggered by the first jackpot symbol, may be used as the first gaming state, and which is triggered by the second jackpot symbol. The high probability high base state 624 may be the second game state, or (2) both the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol may be jackpot symbols with no change in probability, that is, any jackpot symbol However, the low probability high base state 622 may be transitioned to the low probability high base state 622. In that case, the low probability high base state 622 to which the first jackpot symbol has been triggered may be used as the first gaming state, and the second The low probability high base state 622 to which the jackpot symbol is triggered may be used as the second gaming state. It should be noted that this modification is applicable to the embodiments described below.

In FIG. 35(a), the first jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol with a probability change, and after the end of the special game, a high probability high base state 624 is established where the end condition is the first condition, that is, the start of the jackpot symbol variation. Move to. As in the first embodiment, after the super-shortened symbol fluctuations 630 and 632 are displayed with the ball entry easy state turned on, when the jackpot reach variation 634 is started (S930), the ball entry easy state is turned off. The game is then terminated, and at least the normal ball entry state is maintained until the subsequent special game 636 period.

In FIG. 35(b), the second jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol with no probability change, and after the end of the special game, the second condition, that is, the low probability high base state where the end condition is the end of the jackpot symbol variation. The process moves to 622. As in the first embodiment, even after the super-shortening symbol fluctuations 640 and 642 are displayed with the easy-to-enter state turned on, even when the jackpot reach fluctuation 644 starts (S932), the easy-to-enter state remains on. Continued. Thereafter, when the reach variation 644 is ended (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and ended, and the subsequent period of the special game 646 is in the normal ball entry state.

As described above, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the normal electric accessory 90 is closed to suppress the ball from entering the second starting port 12 during the reach fluctuation, which has a particularly long fluctuation time. It is possible to easily prevent the ball output rate from increasing more than necessary. Such specifications result in a design that allows game machine developers to easily keep the ball payout rate within a suitable range.

As a modification, as described above, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be the same gaming state, and in that case, both may be specified as the high probability high base state 624, for example. Thereby, even if the destination gaming state is the same, different ending conditions can be set depending on the type of jackpot symbol.

In another modified example, for example, the first end condition is that the number of symbol changes after transitioning to the easy entry state reaches a predetermined number, and the second end condition is that It may be the case that the result is a small hit, or the case that the result of the judgment is a small hit a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) (the second condition is the latter). In this case, the predetermined number of times to be set may be changed depending on the jackpot symbol). In this case, if a jackpot is achieved with the first jackpot symbol, the state will shift to an easy-to-enter state from the end of the special game until the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times, and if a jackpot is achieved with the second jackpot symbol, the special game will start. After the completion of the process, the state shifts to an easy-to-enter state until a small hit occurs. Only one of the first condition and the second condition may be adopted.In other words, the condition for ending the easy entry state may be only the first condition, regardless of the jackpot symbol. However, only the second condition may be adopted. Moreover, as a more suitable example, the first condition and the second condition may be combined. For example, either (1) the number of symbol changes after transitioning to the easy-to-enter state reaches 100, or the result of the judgment after transitioning to the easy-to-enter state is a small hit. or (2) the number of symbol changes since entering the easy state has reached 100, or the correctness judgment has been made after shifting to the easy entering state. The easy-to-enter state may be configured to end when the number of times the result is a small hit reaches 50, or when one of the following conditions is satisfied.

Other configurations and modifications are the same as those in the first embodiment. For example, the first game may be executed preferentially so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time at least in the high base state. That is, when displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner, the main display control means 250 waits for the variable display of the other, and at least when the timing to start variation is reached in the high base state. Even if the lottery value is held as the second hold, the first hold is extinguished, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51 is executed with priority. In this case, the frequency at which the second special symbol 52 changes, that is, the speed at which the second hold is consumed becomes slower, and the ball output rate in the second game in the high base state becomes difficult to exceed 1, so that the ball output rate is kept within an appropriate range. becomes easier to control.

For example, in the first game state (for example, high probability high base state 624), the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 determines that the non-reach and out fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that it becomes longer. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to become relatively long when the number of first holds reaches a predetermined number or more, or may become longer as the number of first holds increases. It may be determined as follows. Thereby, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of second retention becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. However, as in the first embodiment, the determination that the non-reach and miss fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not carried out in the high probability high base state 624 immediately after the so-called first hit; It may be performed only in the high probability high base state 624. That is, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the success/failure judgment by the first success/failure judgment means 221 or the second truth/failure judgment means 222 in the low probability low base state 620 is a jackpot, the subsequent high probability The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the off variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability base state 624. In addition, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot, in the high probability high base state 624, the first special symbol 51 The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long. As a modified example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 is relatively short. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined such that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 without reach is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined such that the variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state where the reach is not reached and the variation time is shorter than the variation time when the first special symbol 51 is out of reach and in the low base state. The variation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to become relatively long when the number of first holds reaches a predetermined number or more, or may be determined to become longer as the number of first holds increases. You may. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball. As a further modification, the above-mentioned decision to make the non-reach and miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 relatively long is not implemented in the high probability high base state 624 during consecutive winnings, but instead in the high probability high probability state 624 immediately after the first hit. It may be performed only in the high base state 624. That is, in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the success/failure judgment by the first success/failure judgment means 221 or the second truth/failure judgment means 222 is a jackpot, the high probability high base state 624 is shifted to the low probability low base state. It is relatively shorter than the off fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 to which the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 or the second judgment means 222 in 620 is a jackpot. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the first special symbol 51 becomes the same. In this way, immediately after the first win where there is a good possibility that the first hold is still left, it is possible to congratulate the transition to the high probability high base state 624, or to celebrate the transition to the high probability high base state 624. It is possible to secure the time for performing a special performance such as explaining the nature and content of the performance as a variable time.

Furthermore, for example, a specification may be adopted in which the first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously and in parallel. The main display control means 250 can display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner even when the second special symbol 52 is changing, and can display the second special symbol 52 even while the first special symbol 51 is changing. It can be displayed in a variable manner. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines the non-reach out fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 when the first pending number is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time is relatively long. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 without reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach and fluctuation regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the non-reachable fluctuation time. Further, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out variation time of the second special symbol 52. These also make it easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself, since the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the second retention speed is. As a further modification, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol when the number of first reserved symbols is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach and off variation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 that is out of reach and out of reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 that is out of reach and out of reach may be determined regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the variation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the non-reachable variation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first pending pieces is large in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 becomes shorter. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

Further, for example, the main display control means 250 may be designed to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner, the main display control means 250 waits for the variable display of the other, and at the same time, when the timing for starting the variation of the second special symbol 52 has come. In this case, even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is executed with priority. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines that the second special symbol 52 has an off fluctuation time when the number of first pending pieces is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that it becomes relatively long. For example, the non-reach out fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 where the number of first pending pieces is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) is the second special when the number of first pending pieces is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol 52 without reach, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 with no reach and fluctuation regardless of the number of first pending pieces. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the non-reachable fluctuation time. Further, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out variation time of the second special symbol 52. These also make it easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself, since the faster the player hits the ball aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the second retention speed is. As a further modification, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects the second special symbol when the number of first reserved symbols is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is relatively short. For example, if the number of the first reserved symbols is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) ) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is set so that the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of first pending pieces is 0. Alternatively, the second special symbol 52 may be set such that the non-reach/miss variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the non-reach/miss variation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of first reserved symbols. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the higher the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 without reach. A variation pattern may also be determined. In this way, the speed at which the second hold is used up becomes faster as the ball is hit toward the first starting port 11, so the speed at which the second hold is used up can be adjusted depending on how the player hits the ball.

<Third Example> Left-handed hit warning in small hit rush Since the basic configuration of the third example is the same as the first and second examples, the description of the common points will be omitted, and it will be different from the first and second examples. The explanation will focus on the differences.

In a high probability low base state where a small hit rush is executed, a high probability high base state, a low probability high base state, etc., the player hits the ball to the right with the aim of hitting the ball into the second starting opening 12. . On the other hand, even in a low probability low base state where the small hit rush, high probability high base state, and low probability high base state are not executed, if you hit the ball right and let it enter the second starting port 12, the high probability low base state The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in a high probability high base state and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the case of left-handed hitting (low probability low base state). A pattern is selected, which lowers gaming efficiency more than necessary. In order to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player, a visual or auditory warning is issued to the player urging him to hit the ball to the left aiming at the first starting opening 11. In addition, players who are aware that left-handed hitting is strongly recommended, and who dare to play right-handed with the aim of generating a small hit by hitting the ball into the second starting hole 12, at the risk of reducing gaming efficiency. Since it is also possible that the ball will be hit left-handed, we will give consideration to the disadvantages of the game parlor due to such a hitting method, and if a ball enters the second starting hole 12, a strong warning (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitting") will be issued to encourage left-handed hitting. Also called a "warning," this is a guidance display that is displayed when it is detected that the player is playing right-handed even though the player should be hitting left-handed, and strongly urges the player to return to hitting left-handed. (guidance display). Note that the left-handed warning indicates a high base state (in this case, when simply referred to as a "high base state", it is at least either a "low probability high base state" or a "high probability high base state") or The notification to the player is more emphasized than the right-handed guidance that is displayed in situations where right-handed hitting is recommended, such as a rush for small wins, and the level of emphasis is close to that of warnings of cheating or errors. It's okay. Note that a left-handed strike warning may be issued when the player passes through an operating port located on the right side of the board, instead of the second starting port 12.

In the normal probability state and normal ball entry state, when the ball enters the second starting port 12, a warning urging the player to hit the ball aiming at the first starting port 11 is outputted by a predetermined output means for at least a predetermined period of time. do. The predetermined output means here may be, for example, the blinking of the decorative lamp 111 or the output of a loud warning sound from the speaker 108, and may be controlled by the sub CPU 310 or the effect control means 304, or may be controlled by the sub CPU 310 or the effect control means 304, or may be a device connected to the game parlor computer. The external information output terminal 160 may be controlled by the main CPU 290. The predetermined period of time for outputting the warning may vary depending on the type of output means; for example, the flashing period of the decorative lamp 111 may be 30 seconds, and the period of outputting the warning sound may be 10 seconds. If a ball enters the second starting port 12 again while such a warning is being output, the measurement timer for the output period of the warning that is currently being output is reset and the output of the warning for a predetermined period of time is restarted. As a result of the above, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the appropriate distribution of balls depending on the gaming state and the firing situation of the game balls, and it is possible to create a design that makes it easy to keep the ball output within a suitable range without impairing the originally intended gameplay. can. Further, a state in which such a left-handed hit warning is executed is referred to as a normal output state.

If the second suspension reaches the upper limit while the left-handed player warning is being output, the left-handed player's warning is switched from the normal output state to the output limited state. This is because when the second hold is full, the player will stop hitting right-handed because the opportunity to judge whether the ball is correct or not will not increase even if the ball enters the second starting port 12, and there is no benefit to continuing hitting right-handed. be. Further, even if the second hold is full and the right-handed game is continued, there will be no increase in the chances of making a right or wrong decision, so there will be little disadvantage to the gaming parlor. The output restriction state here may be, for example, stopping the left-handed player warning, or may be a process of reducing the level of the left-handed player warning, such as the light emission intensity of the decorative lamp 111 or the volume of the warning sound, from a strong level to a weak level. (For example, the light emission intensity may be lowered than in the normal output state, or the volume of the warning sound may be lowered than in the normal output state). In addition, in the output restriction state, if a part of the second hold is used up and the ball enters the second starting port 12 again after it is below the upper limit, the output restriction state is immediately canceled and the left The strike warning will be resumed.

If a ball enters the first starting port 11 while the left-handed batting warning is being output, it is assumed that the player has stopped hitting the right and started hitting the left, and the left-handed batting warning is terminated. In addition, if the game state changes to a situation where the ball should enter the second starting port 12 while the left-handed warning is being output, that is, if the game state changes to a high base state or a small hit rush (high probability low base state), When the game shifts to a special game, the left-handed hit warning is also forcibly terminated.

Until a predetermined period elapses after the situation changes from the situation where the ball should be hit to the right, that is, the situation where the ball should enter the second starting port 12, to the situation where the ball should be hit to the left, that is, the situation where the ball should enter the first starting port 11. limits the output of the left-handed hit warning even in the normal probability state and normal ball entry state. A change to the situation where you should hit left-handed can occur, for example, when the high base state ends (the high probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol changes ends and shifts to the low probability low base state), or when the symbol changes. A small hit rush due to the end of a low probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of times and a transition to a low probability low base state) or the end of a probability fluctuating state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol changes. This is the end of Even if the situation changes to a situation where players should play left-handed due to the end of such a high base state or small winning rush, even if there is a delay in switching to left-handed hitting immediately after the end of the situation where players should play right-handed, the player will be left-handed for a while. is intended to allow this. The limitation on the output of the left-handed player warning may be, for example, to lower the intensity level of the warning, or may be to not output the left-handed player warning itself. The predetermined period for limiting the output of the left-handed hit warning may be until a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the high base state or the small hit rush, or from the end of the high base state or the small win rush. It may be until the symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or until the ball enters the second starting port 12. Furthermore, even if the base is high or right after the small hit rush ends, while the second hold is full, the output of the left-handed hit warning may be limited, considering that the disadvantage is small even if the right-handed hit is made. . Furthermore, the output of the left-handed hit warning may be restricted even during execution of a special game.

Note that even while the output of the left-handed hit warning is limited, the left-handed hit guide (when the situation changes from a situation where the ball should be hit right to a situation where the ball should be hit left This is a guidance display that is displayed as a result of this, and there are no restrictions on the display of the guidance display that prompts the player to return to playing left-handed. For example, immediately after the situation changes from a situation where you should hit to the right to a situation where you should hit to the left (for example, the high base state ends, the high probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol changes ends, and the low probability low base state ends) As mentioned above, the degree of emphasis is Although the output of a strong left-handed warning is limited, the guidance display urging the player to play left-handed on the screen of the effect display device 60 or a dedicated decorative lamp is displayed without restriction.

If more than a predetermined number of balls enter the second starting port 12 while the output of the left-handed hit warning is restricted, the restriction is canceled. The predetermined number here exceeds the number of pitches that could have been received if the player continued hitting right-handed due to inertia immediately after the situation in which he should hit right-handed, and it can be assumed that he continues to hit right-handed intentionally. For example, 10 balls.

As a modified example, in a high base state or a high probability low base state (small win rush), the player aims at the second starting port 12 for at least a predetermined period of time, triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 11. A right-handed hit warning may be output to encourage the player to hit the ball. If the ball enters the second starting port 12 while the right-handed warning is being output, or if the situation changes so that the ball should enter the first starting port 11 (the period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol changes) When a high probability high base state ends and moves to a low probability low base state, or when a low probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol changes ends and moves to a low probability low base state, etc.) terminates the right-handed hit warning that is being output.

FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the relationship between changes in the gaming state and the timing of the left-handed hit warning. This figure illustrates the relationship among (a) gaming state, (b) left-handed play, (c) right-handed play, (d) warning light emission, and (e) timing of warning sound. In (a), a period 650 is a small win rush (high probability low base state) or a high base state, and a period 652 is a low probability low base state. In the period 650, even if a right-handed ball entering the second starting port 12 is detected at the timing of S940 in (c), the left-handed hit warning in (d) and (e) is not output. When the period 650 ends in S942 and switches to the low probability low base state period 652, the output of the left-handed hit warning is limited for the next 20 seconds, and even if a right-handed hit is detected in S944 during that period, the left-handed hit warning will not be output. No output. When the left-handed player warning restriction is lifted at the timing of S946, which is 20 seconds after S942, when a right-handed player is detected at the timing of S948, the left-handed player warning starts emitting light as shown in (d), and (e) ) will start outputting a left-handed warning sound. The warning sound in (e) ends at S950 10 seconds after the start, but the warning light emission in (d) continues for 30 seconds, and if a right-handed hit is detected again in S952 during that time, the period of the warning light emission is measured. The timer will be reset and the 30 seconds of light will start again, and the output of the warning sound will also start again. The warning sound in (e) ends in S954 10 seconds after the start, and the warning light emission in (d) ends in S956 30 seconds after reset. After that, when a right-handed player is detected again in S958, the left-handed player warnings in (d) and (e) are restarted, but when a right-handed player in (b) is detected, a left-handed player in (d) and (e) is restarted. The warning will be terminated. In addition, as a modified example, if right-handed hitting is detected again in S958, the left-handed hitting warnings in (d) and (e) are restarted, and even if right-handed hitting in (b) is detected, (d) and (e) The left-handed strike warning may be configured to continue until a specified time.

<Fourth Example> Relationship between special game types and small winning rush Since the basic configuration of the fourth example is the same as the first to third examples, description of the common points will be omitted, and the first to third examples will be explained below. The explanation will focus on the differences from the example.

As shown in FIG. 33, the basic game in the embodiment is to obtain balls by consecutively winning a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot that provides a relatively large profit during the execution of a special game. It's a fun game. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot occurs with a relatively small profit during the execution of a special game in the process of consecutive winnings, if the jackpot is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, then during the execution of the special game In addition to the profits awarded, a derivative game is provided in which profits are generated during execution of the small winning rush. As a result, for example, a small hit rush occurs only from a situation where a player loses in a battle performance that stimulates whether or not a jackpot with a relatively large profit will occur during the execution of a special game. It is possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows you to earn money. In addition, rather than the occurrence of jackpots where the profits given during special games such as 10R fixed variable jackpot and 4R fixed variable jackpot are relatively large, it is more profitable to add up the profit of 2R fixed variable jackpot and the profit of small hit rush. It is also possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the game becomes a game, and it is possible to attract a lot of attention even to a jackpot with a relatively small jackpot profit. In other words, if we simply compare only the expected value of the number of prize balls won during the special game, the expected value is higher for a 10R probability-variable jackpot and a 4R probability-variable jackpot than for a 2R probability-variable jackpot, but between a 10R probability-variable jackpot, a 4R probability-variable jackpot and a 2R probability-variable jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the small hit rush from the difference between the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired with Since the expected value of the number of game balls that can be obtained through the game is larger, the total profit of the 2R probability variable jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is larger than the profit of the 10R probability variable jackpot and the 4R probability variable jackpot. In addition, since a relatively large profit is given to the player due to the small hit rush in the high probability low base state, it is not necessary to provide more profit than necessary in the high base state, so the ball output rate can be kept within a suitable range. It can be designed to be easily accommodated.

First, the result of the judgment on the second special symbol 52, which is the main part of the game in the high probability high base state (corresponding to the second starting hole 12 where the player aims to enter the ball in the high probability high base state), is the jackpot. The types of special games that are executed when There is a second special game. The first special game here is, for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot and a 4R probability variation jackpot, and the second special game is, for example, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 2R regular jackpot. After the first special game ends, a high probability high base state 624 is entered. On the other hand, after the second special game ends, the high probability low base state 626 or the low probability high base state 622 is entered. Specifically, if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the state becomes a high probability low base state 626, and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, the state becomes a low probability high base state 622.

FIG. 37 is a flow diagram showing the relationship between the type of special game, the destination performance, and the game state. If the result of the judgment in the high probability high base state 624 or the high probability low base state 626 corresponds to a jackpot, "Battle begins!!" is displayed as in the battle effect screen 670, and the special game to be executed after that is displayed. A battle effect is executed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight in order to incite whether or not it is a special game (big hit) with a relatively large profit. If the type of the special game is a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 4R probability-variable jackpot, a ``win'' scene indicating an advantageous result to the player is displayed as a result of the battle performance. The probability that the type of special game is a 10R variable jackpot is approximately 35%, and in that case, after the 10R special game is executed with "HYPER BONUS!!" displayed as shown in the first bonus screen 671, the high A transition is made to the high probability base state 624. The probability that the type of special game is a 4R special game is about 30%, and in that case, after the 4R special game is executed with "BONUS!!" displayed on the second bonus screen 672, the high probability Transition to high base state 624. In total, the battle performance will be a "win" with a probability of approximately 65%.

When the type of special game is a 2R probability-variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, a ``defeat'' scene indicating a disadvantageous result to the player is displayed as a result of the battle performance. However, whether to give a chance to reverse from the "defeat", that is, whether the 2R jackpot involves a change in probability, or whether it involves a transition to the high probability low base state 626 or the low probability high base state 622. A branching performance which is a performance that stimulates the game is executed as a starting performance of a special game with a 2R jackpot. In the branch performance, after displaying "Challenge Start!!" as shown in the branch performance screen 673, "Press the button!" is displayed along with a button image as shown in the button screen 674 to prompt the player to press the performance button 109. prompt. The probability of proceeding from a battle performance to a branch performance, that is, the probability of "defeating" in a battle performance, is approximately 35%. Of that 35%, there is a 15% probability of a 2R probability variable jackpot and the branch effect becomes a "success", and a 20% probability of a 2R normal jackpot and the branch effect becomes a "failure". If the branch performance is "success", "success!!" is displayed as a challenge success screen 675, and after a 2R special game is executed, a transition is made to a high probability low base state 626. If the branch effect is "failure", "failure!!" is displayed as a challenge failure screen 676, and after a 2R special game is executed, a transition is made to a low probability high base state 622. Note that this branch performance may be performed before the execution of the 2R special game, that is, during fluctuation, or may be performed during the start demonstration of the 2R special game.

In the high probability high base state 624, the ball payout rate is designed to be within 1, whereas in the high probability low base state 626 there is a small hit rush, so the probability is higher than that in the high probability high base state 624. State 626 can be said to be a gaming state more advantageous to the player. In addition, the expected value of the total number of prize balls that combines the number of prize balls in the special game of 2R probability variable jackpot and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit rush is the number of prize balls in the special game of 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, and the high probability This is larger than the expected value of the total number of prize balls including the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the high base state 624. In other words, if you simply compare the expected value of the number of prize balls won during the special game, the expected value is higher for a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 4R probability-variable jackpot than for a 2R probability-variable jackpot, but for a 10R probability-variable jackpot, a 4R probability-variable jackpot, and a 2R probability-variable jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the small hit rush is determined by the difference between the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired with Since the expected value of the number of game balls that can be obtained by playing the game is larger, the sum of the profit of the 2R probability variable jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is higher than the profit of the 10R probability variable jackpot and the 4R probability variable jackpot in the high probability high base state 624. greater than the sum of profits. Therefore, when taking into account the profit after the special game, the 10R probability variable jackpot or 4R probability variable jackpot, which transfers to the high probability high base state 624 after the special game ends, is better than the 2R, which transfers to the low probability high base state 622 after the special game ends. It can be said that a variable jackpot is more advantageous to the player.

<Fifth Example> Alternative symbols and simple symbols The basic configuration of the fifth example is the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments, so the description of the common features will be omitted, and the differences from the first to fourth embodiments will be omitted. I will mainly explain.

FIG. 38 shows the arrangement of decorative designs, alternative designs, and simple designs. (a) shows the basic arrangement relationship between the main decorative pattern 600, the alternative pattern 601, and the simple pattern 602, (b) illustrates the display mode in the low probability low base state, and (c) shows the high probability high base state The following is an example of a display mode in a high probability low base state.

In FIG. 38(a), three main decorative symbols 600 are decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52, and the three symbols are displayed in a variable manner using a large area near the center of the screen. be done. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has a parallel specification in which the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be varied simultaneously in parallel, but the main decorative symbol 600 is the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. It does not correspond to both special symbols 52 at the same time, but corresponds to one of the special symbols depending on the game state. For example, in a first game that mainly displays a variable display of the first special symbol 51 by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting opening 11 like in a low probability low base state, a decoration corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is displayed. A main decorative pattern 600 is displayed in a variable manner as a pattern. On the other hand, in a second game in which the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a variable manner by aiming at the second starting port 12 and hitting right, such as in the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state, the second special symbol 52 is displayed. A main decorative pattern 600 is variably displayed as a decorative pattern corresponding to 52.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), an alternative pattern 601 and a simple pattern 602 are displayed in a variable manner in a small area smaller than the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 and provided at the corner of the screen. The alternative pattern 601 is a pattern that is displayed in a complementary manner in addition to the display of the main decorative pattern 600 to ensure that the decorative pattern is always displayed somewhere on the screen of the effect display device 60. . For example, even if the main decorative pattern is hidden during execution of a battle performance, the alternative pattern 601 continues to be displayed (and is displayed in front of the battle performance). The display of decorative designs is guaranteed. The alternative symbol 601 includes an alternative symbol 601a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and an alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the second special symbol 52. The alternative design 601 includes one set of three small designs in a manner corresponding to the main decorative design 600 consisting of three designs, and two sets of designs corresponding to the first special design 51 and the second special design 52. It is a mini decorative pattern, so to speak. Just as the main decorative pattern 600 indicates a jackpot when all three of them are the same, such as "444" and "777," all three of the alternative symbols 601 are also the same, such as "444" and "777." A jackpot is indicated when the symbols are stopped in a pattern that is aligned, and a hit is indicated when the symbols are stopped in a pattern that is not aligned.

The simple symbol 602 is a symbol for suggesting whether or not at least one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner, and for indicating the result of the validity determination. The simple symbols 602 include a simple symbol 602a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and a simple symbol 602b corresponding to the second special symbol 52, and are variably displayed in the vicinity of alternative symbols 601a and 601b, respectively. In addition, the simple symbol 602 further includes a simple symbol 602c corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and a simple symbol 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, each of which is variably displayed at a position away from the alternative symbols 601a and 601b. Ru. By displaying the simple symbol 602 at a plurality of separate locations, it is possible to ensure which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. In other words, for this alternative symbol, even if the main decorative symbol is hidden during a battle performance, etc., the variable display that alternately displays "○" and "x", which will be described later, will be applied. By continuing the display (and by displaying it in front of the battle performance), it is ensured that which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed. The simple symbol 602 is a symbol that indicates the result of the validity determination regarding the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 using a simple symbol or figure such as "o" or "x". The simple symbol 602 indicates a jackpot when it stops at "○" and indicates a miss when it stops at "x". In addition, in FIG. 38(a), for convenience, both the alternative symbol 601a and the alternative symbol 601b are stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, but only one is stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and the other is a miss. It is preferable to stop in a specific manner. Similarly, in FIG. 38(a), for convenience, both the simple symbol 602a and the simple symbol 602b are stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, but only one is stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and the other is a miss. It is preferable that the simple symbol 602c and the simple symbol 602d stop in a manner that indicates a jackpot, but only one of them stops in a manner that indicates a jackpot, and the other one stops in a manner that indicates a jackpot. It is preferable to stop in the manner shown.

In the low probability low base state of FIG. 38(b), the main decorative pattern 600a corresponding to the first special pattern 51 is displayed in a fluctuating manner near the center of the screen, and alternative symbols are displayed in a manner corresponding to the main decorative pattern 600a. 601a is also displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbols 602a and 602c are also displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol 51. At this time, the main decorative pattern 600b corresponding to the second special symbol 52 is not displayed, and when the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a variable manner, the simple symbols 602b, 602d and the alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the second special symbol 52 are not displayed. Fluctuations are displayed. The simple symbols 602b, 602d and the alternative symbol 601b whose fluctuation is stopped are displayed in a manner indicating that they are out of order.

In the low probability high base state, high probability high base state, and high probability low base state of FIG. An alternative pattern 601b is also variably displayed in a manner corresponding to the main decorative pattern 600b. The simple symbols 602b and 602d are also variably displayed in correspondence with the second special symbol 52. At this time, the main decorative pattern 600a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is not displayed, and when the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner, the simple symbols 602a, 602c and the alternative symbol 601a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 are not displayed. Fluctuations are displayed. The simple symbols 602a, 602c and the alternative symbol 601a whose fluctuations are stopped are displayed in a manner indicating that they are out of order.

Here, in the first hit, that is, in the high base state after the end of the special game related to the jackpot of the first special symbol 51 that occurred in the low probability low base state, at least the fluctuation is stopped immediately after transitioning to the high base state. When the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the first special symbol 51, they are displayed in a stopped symbol mode of "x" indicating a miss (see FIG. 38(c)). The first special symbol 51 immediately after this transition to the high base state is originally a simple symbol because it remains a jackpot symbol unless the first winning lottery value is suspended or the ball enters the first starting port 11. 602a and 602c should also remain stopped at "○" indicating a jackpot. However, when the first special symbol 51 is not changed for a long time and returns to the low probability low base state (for example, when the first winning lottery value is not pending in the low probability low base state) The first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol, a special game is executed, and even in the low-probability high-base state that shifts thereafter, the first win/fail lottery value is not suspended, and the second special symbol 52 is displayed 50 times in a fluctuating manner. If the simple symbols 602a and 602c start changing from "○" when the low-probability high-base state ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state by Since a long time has already passed, it is difficult to tell which jackpot the "○" indicates, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the state changes from the initial hit to the high base state, the simple symbols 602a and 602c are forcibly displayed as "x". Confusion among players is avoided by starting the first symbol variation of the subsequent simple symbols 602a and 602c (which normally occurs after returning to the low-probability, low-base state) from an "x" indicating a miss. do.

In addition, after returning from the high base state or the high probability low base state to the low probability low base state, that is, after a long time has passed without changing the first special symbol 51 as described above, the low probability low base state is returned again. When returning (for example, in a low probability low base state, the first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol in a state where there is no reservation of the first win/fail lottery value and a special game is executed, and then the low probability high base state In the case where the first winning lottery value is not suspended even in the state, and the second special symbol 52 fluctuates and displays 50 times, the low probability high base state ends and shifts to the low probability low base state). The variable display of the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601a corresponding to the pattern variation of the special pattern 51 starts from an irregular out-of-line pattern such as "357", for example. Usually, a long time has passed since the previous jackpot of the first special symbol 51, and the game starts from a jackpot mode with a probability change such as "777" corresponding to the previous jackpot of the first special symbol 51. If this happens, there is a risk that the player may be misled into thinking that the previous jackpot is variable in probability. Alternatively, even if the game starts from a jackpot mode that does not involve any change in probability, such as "444", which corresponds to the previous jackpot of the second special symbol 52, the player may think that the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 52 has started to fluctuate. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

In addition, even if a jackpot occurs accidentally with the first special symbol 51 in a game state other than the low probability low base state, the first special symbol 51 that has stopped fluctuating in the high base state after the end of the special game Correspondingly, when the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in a stopped state, the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in a stopped symbol mode of "x" indicating a miss (see FIG. 38(c)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from a high base state or a high probability low base state to a low probability low base state, at least the simple symbol 602b corresponds to the second special symbol 52 that has stopped fluctuating immediately after transitioning to the low probability low base state. , 602d are displayed in a stopped state, they are displayed in the form of a stopped symbol of "x" indicating a miss (see FIG. 38(b)). If the second special symbol 52 at the time of transition to this low probability low base state is a jackpot symbol, it will remain stopped at the jackpot symbol unless the second winning lottery value is suspended or the ball enters the second starting port 12. Therefore, originally, the simple symbols 602b and 602d should also remain stopped at "○" indicating a jackpot. However, after that, when a long time passes without the second special symbol 52 changing and the second special symbol 52 shifts to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state again (for example, when the second winning lottery value is changed in the low probability high base state) In a state where there is no reservation, the second special symbol 52 stops at the jackpot symbol and a special game is executed, and even in the low probability high base state which is then shifted to, the reservation of the second win/fail lottery value does not occur and the first special symbol 51 is displayed 50 times, the low probability high base state ends and shifts to the low probability low base state, and after that, the first special symbol 51 is displayed in the low probability low base state without the suspension of the second winning lottery value. stops at the jackpot symbol, a special game is executed, and then shifts to a low-probability, high-base state), if the simple symbols 602b and 602d start to fluctuate from "○", the second special symbol 52 Since a long time has already passed since the previous jackpot, it is difficult to tell which jackpot the "○" indicates, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when transitioning from a high base state or a high probability low base state to a low probability low base state, the simple symbols 602b and 602d are forcibly displayed as "x". By starting the initial symbol variation of the subsequent simple symbols 602b and 602d (which normally occurs after transitioning to the low probability high base state or high probability high base state again) from the "x" indicating a miss, To avoid player confusion.

In addition, after the low probability low base state returns to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, that is, after a long period of time has passed without the second special symbol 52 changing, the low probability high base state or the high probability When transitioning to a high probability base state (for example, in a low probability high base state, the second special symbol 52 stops at the jackpot symbol in a state where there is no reservation of the second win/fail lottery value, a special game is executed, and then the transition occurs) Even in the low probability high base state, the second win/fail lottery value is not suspended, and the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner 50 times, thereby ending the low probability high base state and transitioning to the low probability low base state. , when the first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol in the low probability low base state without the suspension of the second win/fail lottery value and the special game is executed, and then shifts to the low probability high base state) The variable display of the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601b corresponding to the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 starts from an irregular out-of-order pattern such as "357", for example. Usually, a long time has passed since the previous jackpot of the second special symbol 52, and the game starts from a jackpot mode with no probability change, such as "444" corresponding to the previous jackpot of the second special symbol 52. This is because if this happens, the player may be misled into thinking that the previous jackpot is not subject to change in probability. Alternatively, even if the game starts from a jackpot mode with a probability change such as "777" which corresponds to the jackpot of the first special symbol 51 immediately before, the player may think that the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 51 has started to fluctuate. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

On the other hand, if a jackpot with a change in probability occurs from a high base state or a high probability low base state, and the state returns to a high base state or a high probability low base state after the special game ends, the second special symbol 52 of the next first time The main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601b corresponding to the pattern variation may start changing from the jackpot mode of the immediately previous main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601b, such as "777".

In the low probability low base state of FIG. 38(b), the simple symbols 602b and 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, which is not the main character of the game, are always displayed on the screen as long as a certain degree of visibility is ensured. There is a view that there is little need to do so. Therefore, the simple symbols 602b and 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52 are hidden after a predetermined first time period from the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52, and a predetermined time is set from the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52. The simple pattern 602b and the simple pattern 602d are undisplayed and put into a display state a second time before. For example, the simple symbols 602b and 602d are hidden one second after the second special symbol 52 starts to fluctuate, and the simple symbols 602b and 602d are displayed one second before the scheduled stop timing of the second special symbol 52. state.

However, for the first symbol fluctuation after the power is turned on of the Pachinko gaming machine 100, the performance control means 304 may not be able to recognize the fluctuation start timing or fluctuation stop timing. The simple pattern 602b and the simple pattern 602d are not hidden even after the elapsed time. In addition, immediately after transitioning from the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state to the low probability low base state, there is a high possibility that the first winning/failure lottery value will be held at zero, while the second winning/failure lottery value will be suspended. Since there is a high possibility that the hold is 1 or more, there is also a high possibility that the first symbol change immediately after the transition to the low probability low base state is not the first special symbol 51 but the second special symbol 52. In such a situation, if the simple symbols 602b and 602d are hidden, it will be difficult for the player to recognize which of the first special symbols 51 and second special symbols 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbols 602b and 602d will not be hidden even if 1 second has elapsed since the first symbol change immediately after the transition to the low probability state. If the simple symbol 602d is not hidden, or during the first symbol variation immediately after transitioning to the low probability low base state, the simple symbol b and the simple symbol 602d are not displayed until 10 seconds, which is 1 second or more, have elapsed from the start of the variation. (not hidden).

If the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is restarted due to some malfunction or operation during symbol fluctuation (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), the main decorative symbol 600 will be restarted in a high-speed fluctuation state. This is because immediately after the power is turned on, there is a high possibility that the performance control means 304 cannot recognize which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 should be displayed as the main decorative symbol 600. Furthermore, if the main decorative pattern 600 is restarted after the fluctuation is stopped, if the fluctuation time is a long fluctuation pattern such as 3 minutes or more, no fluctuation will be displayed for a long time, which is not desirable as a return screen. . In addition, the display of the high-speed fluctuation state is always fluctuation at a constant speed (high speed), and the speed is not reduced until the timing of the fluctuation stop, and the high-speed fluctuation state is changed at the timing of the fluctuation stop. Switch to stopped state.

<Sixth Example>
The basic configuration of the sixth embodiment is the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments, so we will omit the description of the common features and explain the differences from the first to fifth embodiments, especially the fifth embodiment, which has a strong relationship. We will mainly explain the differences between the two.

In this embodiment, a movable logo accessory is provided along the screen of the effect display device 60 and operates in front of the screen so as to cover and overlap at least a portion of the screen. In addition, light guide plates, which are plate-shaped performance accessories having the same area as the screen of the performance display device 60 and have transparency and a light emitting function, are provided in an overlapping manner so as to cover the entire screen of the performance display device 60. These will operate or emit light as part of the performance. Here, the display priority of the simple pattern 602 is set higher than other effect displays, such as a preview effect, a background effect, and a variable effect of the main decorative pattern 600. Therefore, the following adjustments are made to reduce the possibility that the movement of the movable logo accessory or the light emission from the light guide plate will interfere with the display of the simple pattern 602, and to prevent the simple pattern 602 from interfering with the display of the results of the validity judgment. .

FIG. 39 shows the arrangement of the movable logo accessory and the light guide plate. (a) illustrates the arrangement and operation position of the logo movable accessory 680, and (b) illustrates the arrangement of the light guide plate pattern 681. The logo movable accessory 680 is a decorative movable accessory in which a logo such as the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a motif subject, a character name, etc. is imprinted, and is made of a transparent material such as acrylic. A light-emitting member such as an LED is built into a movable object. In a normal state, the logo movable accessory 680 is in a stationary state at an initial position where it does not cover the screen at all, or at least slightly, above the screen of the production display device 60 (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 39(a)). Drawn logo movable accessory 680). In this stationary state, not only the main decorative pattern 600 but also the alternative pattern 601 and the simple pattern 602 are all easily visible to the player.

The movable logo accessory 680 operates under the control of the performance control means 304 according to the performance pattern. For example, at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance, the movable logo accessory 680 emits light and descends, that is, slides downward, thereby serving to notify the player that there is a high expectation of a jackpot. When the lowering operation of the movable logo accessory 680 is completed, it remains stationary for a predetermined time at the operation completion position covering approximately the central area of the screen of the effect display device 60 (the movable logo drawn by the broken line in FIG. 39(a) Accessories 680). When the operation of the logo movable accessory 680 is completed, the logo movable accessory 680 or the support mechanism that supports the logo movable accessory 680 from the left and right is in a position where it can overlap the simple symbols 602c and 602d, and these symbols are visible to the player. It may become difficult to see.

In the low probability low base state, if the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12 or if the second reservation stored before the transition to the low probability low base state remains after the transition, the second The second special symbol 52 may be displayed in a variable manner, but since the second game is not the main game in the low probability low base state, the variable time of the second special symbol 52 is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). Sometimes. In the low probability low base state, the main decorative pattern 600 is displayed variably as a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern 51 and does not correspond to the second special pattern 52, so the simple pattern 602b is the pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52. , 602d. However, in particular, the visibility of the simple symbol 602d may be interfered with by the operation completion state of the movable logo accessory 680, and the player does not know when the fluctuation will stop during the extremely long fluctuation time. Therefore, it may be difficult to clearly display the stoppage of fluctuation to the player.

Therefore, when the second special symbol 52 starts to fluctuate in the low-probability low base state, from a timing a predetermined first time before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52 (timing at which the fluctuation stop state starts). , the operation of the movable logo accessory 680 corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is restricted for a predetermined second time period that is longer than the first time period. The first time is, for example, 5 seconds, and the second time is, for example, 7.5 seconds. The first time is the time required for the reciprocating movement of the logo movable accessory 680 (the movement from the initial position to the movement completion position and back to the initial position) and the time required to ensure that the second special symbol 52 stops changing. (The time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52) may be added. For example, the operation time of the logo movable accessory 680 (the time required for reciprocating movement, the time required for movement from the initial position to the movement completion position, or the time required for movement from the movement completion position to the initial position) is 4 seconds. The total of 5 seconds is the first time when the second special symbol 52's fluctuation stop guarantee time (the time before stopping to make it aware that the simple symbols 602c and 602d will change and then stop) is 1 second. becomes. The second time is the first time and the stop time of the second special symbol 52 (this is the time to actually maintain the stop display, and the time may be different depending on whether it is a miss or a small hit). and the time to ensure that the second special symbol 52 starts to fluctuate (this is the time after the simple symbols 602c and 602d stop to recognize that the fluctuation will start from the stopped state, and the actual time of the second special symbol 52) It may be the time obtained by adding the time allowed as an error to the fluctuation start timing of . For example, the first time is 5 seconds, the stop time of the second special symbol 52 is 1.5 seconds (0.5 seconds in the case of a miss, and 1.5 seconds in the case of a small hit), and the second special symbol 52 is stopped for 1.5 seconds. When the guaranteed time for starting fluctuation of the symbol 52 is 1 second, the second time is a total of 7.5 seconds (6.5 seconds in the case of a miss and 7.5 seconds in the case of a small hit).

As described above, in the low probability low base state, the stop and start of fluctuation of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 can be clearly displayed and visually recognized by the player. Note that the movement restriction of the movable logo accessory 680 is only an exceptional control, and it is preferable from a design standpoint that such control be kept to a minimum. No restrictions are placed on extremely infrequent events such as the movement of the movable logo accessory 680 corresponding to the display. However, as a modification, a specification may also be made in which the movement of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 is similarly restricted before and after the stop timing of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the first special symbol 51. Alternatively, the logo movable accessory 680 may not be operated in response to the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. On the other hand, for the same reason, logo movable accessories are also used in game states other than the low probability low base state, that is, the high probability high base state, high probability low base state, and low probability high base state, which are game states in which right-handed players are the main players. 680 operation restrictions are not set. However, as a modified example, even in the high-probability high-base state, high-probability low-base state, and low-probability high-base state, which are game states in which right-hand hitting is the main game state, the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 is Before and after the stop timing, a movement restriction (the above-mentioned movement restriction) of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the first special pattern 51 may be provided, or before and after the stop timing of the simple pattern 602 corresponding to the first special pattern 51. Movement restrictions (the above-mentioned movement restrictions) of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 may be provided. The number of performance types that can be displayed on the screen of the performance display device 60 is greater when the movable logo accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. For example, when the character is at the initial position, an ally character, an enemy character, and a preview effect are displayed, whereas when the character is at the action completion position, only the ally character is displayed. Further, the number of light-emitting decorations such as the decorative lamps 111 blinking on the surface of the game board 80 is greater when the movable logo accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. For example, when in the initial position, only one out of ten light-emitting decorations blinks, while in the operation completion position, nine out of ten light-emitting decorations blink. Further, the button performance that prompts the user to press the performance button 109 is less likely to occur or does not occur when the logo movable accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. In addition, when the logo movable accessory 680 returns from a power-off, the movable logo accessory 680 can perform an initial operation, and the time required for the initial operation is, for example, 10 seconds. Furthermore, the probability that a variation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 does not operate within 10 seconds from the start of symbol variation is greater than the probability that a variation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 can operate within 10 seconds from the start of symbol variation is selected. The probability that the movable logo accessory 680 moves within 10 seconds from the start of the symbol variation is higher, or there is no variation pattern that allows the movable logo accessory 680 to move within 10 seconds from the start of the symbol variation.

In FIG. 39(b), a light guide plate pattern 681 is a pattern drawn on a light guide plate that is a transparent member such as acrylic and is overlaid on the front surface of the screen of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate has a pattern drawn on it by surface processing, and is a dramatic mechanism in which the pattern shines faintly and stands out due to the light of the LED illuminated from the side. The illustrated light guide plate pattern 681a is a pattern modeled after the face of an ally character (the same character as the ally character in the battle production) that is used as a motif in the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the light guide plate patterns 681b and 681c are designed to model lightning bolts. It seems that it was. If at least one of these light guide plate patterns 681a to 681c overlaps the simple pattern 602, there is a risk that the visibility of the simple pattern 602 may be reduced.

In the low probability low base state, if the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12 or if the second reservation stored before the transition to the low probability low base state remains after the transition, the second The second special symbol 52 may be displayed in a variable manner, but since the second game is not the main game in the low probability low base state, the variable time of the second special symbol 52 is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). Sometimes. In the low probability low base state, the main decorative pattern 600 is displayed variably as a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern 51 and does not correspond to the second special pattern 52, so the simple pattern 602b is the pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52. , 602d. However, the visibility of the simple symbol 602d in particular may be interfered with by the light emitted from the light guide plate, and it is difficult for the player to grasp when the fluctuation will stop during an extremely long fluctuation time. It may be difficult to clearly indicate that the fluctuation has stopped.

Therefore, from a timing that is a predetermined third time before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52, and for a predetermined fourth time that is longer than the third time, the light guide plate corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is changed. Limit light emission. The third time is, for example, 1 second, and the fourth time is, for example, 3.5 seconds. The third time is a time for ensuring light emission control of the light guide plate. The reason why the third time is shorter than the first time is that unlike the movable logo accessory 680, which requires a certain amount of time to operate, the light emission control of the light guide plate, which is a non-movable member, is instantaneous (the movable logo accessory 680 requires time to operate, but the light guide plate only needs to interrupt the light emission, so it only takes a moment), so it is sufficient to execute the operation immediately before the stop timing of the second special symbol 52. The fourth time is a time for ensuring the stop time of the second special symbol 52 and the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (as an error with respect to the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol 52). The time may be the sum of the allowable time). For example, the third time is 1 second (the pre-stop time to make you realize that the simple symbols 602c and 602d will change and then stop), and the second special symbol 52 will stop for 1.5 seconds (in case of a miss). may be 0.5 seconds, or 1.5 seconds in the case of a small hit), the guarantee time for the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (recognizing that the fluctuation starts from the state where the simple symbols 602c and 602d are stopped) When the time after the stop of the second special symbol 52 (which is the time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation start timing) is 1 second, the total is 3.5 seconds (2.5 seconds in the case of a miss, In the case of a small hit, the fourth time may be 3.5 seconds.

As described above, in the low probability low base state, the stop and start of fluctuation of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 can be clearly displayed and visually recognized by the player. Further, similar light emission restrictions may be implemented in game states other than the low probability low base state. However, in game states other than the low-probability, low-base state (the above-mentioned game state in which right-handed players are the main players), symbol fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 are extremely infrequent, so the light emission restriction of the light guide plate is minimized. Therefore, the light emission limit timing of the light guide plate may be set to the same timing as the stop timing of the simple symbol 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, or the light emission limit time may be set to be shorter than the light emission limit time in the low probability low base state (for example, 2 seconds). As a further modification, it may be configured such that the same light emission restriction is not performed in game states other than the low probability low base state (the above-mentioned game state mainly consisting of right-handed players).

Note that in this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the movement of the movable logo accessory 680 and the light emission of the light guide plate are restricted in order to ensure the visibility of the simple pattern 602, but in a modified example, the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 is A configuration may be adopted in which display restriction is executed before and after the stop timing of the simple symbol 602. Further, as shown in FIG. 39(a), an intermediate sensor 682 for detecting the presence of the logo movable accessory 680 is provided at an intermediate position between the initial position of the logo movable accessory 680 and the operation completion position, and the above-mentioned restriction execution is performed. When a condition is met, the movable logo accessory 680 may be restricted from exceeding the position of the intermediate sensor 682. Even if the movable logo accessory 680 descends to the position of the intermediate sensor 682, the visibility of the simple pattern 602 is not obstructed, so that the movable logo accessory 680 is allowed to move halfway. For example, if there is a production in which the logo movable accessory 680 descends by 3 steps and a production by which it descends by 2 steps, it is possible to set whether or not there is a restriction such that the production in which the movable logo accessory 680 descends by 3 steps is restricted, but the presentation in which it descends by 2 steps is not restricted. be. In another modification, in order to ensure not only the visibility of the simple pattern 602 but also the visibility of the alternative pattern 601, or to mainly ensure the visibility of the alternative pattern 601, the stop timing of the alternative pattern 601 is determined. The movement of the logo movable accessory 680 and the light emission of the light guide plate may be restricted before and after.

<Seventh Example> Pseudo small winning game performance Since the basic configuration of the seventh example is the same as the first to sixth examples, the description of the common points will be omitted and the same as the first to sixth examples. The differences, especially the differences from the fourth embodiment, which are strongly related, will be mainly explained.

As explained in the fourth embodiment, the basic game is a game in which balls are obtained through a series of successive 10R probability variable jackpots or 4R probability variable jackpots in which the profit from the jackpot is relatively large. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot with a relatively small profit from the jackpot occurs in the process of consecutive winnings, if the jackpot is a 2R variable jackpot, the profit from the small hit rush will be generated in addition to the profit from the jackpot. There is a derivative game that lets you do it.

On the other hand, even if it falls under the 2R variable probability jackpot where a small hit rush occurs, the subsequent gaming state is a variable probability state, so if the next jackpot occurs due to the first symbol change. , the player may not be able to experience the continuous small winning game due to the small winning rush and may end up moving to the next game state. Therefore, during the special game related to the 2R fixed-variable jackpot, we have realized a game that allows you to experience the same action as the small-hit rush and the same effect in advance, and prevent the next jackpot from occurring without experiencing the small-hit rush. .

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning hole and the production timing in the special game of 2R probability variable jackpot. (a) shows the performance content and performance timing, and (b) shows the opening timing of the big prize opening. The period 660 is the start performance period in the special game of 2R probability variable jackpot, the period 661 is the unit game period of the first round, the period 662 is the unit game period of the second round, and the period 663 is the end of the special game. This is the performance period (end demo period).

If the high probability low base state is scheduled to occur after the end of the special game related to the 2R jackpot (2R certain variable jackpot), the production executed in the high probability low base state, that is, the small hit rush, will be performed during the special game related to the 2R jackpot. At the same time, a relatively short opening of the big prize opening is executed multiple times per unit game in one or more unit games among the multiple unit games included in the special game. That is, during the 2R probability variable jackpot special game, the game shifts to a performance mode that is the same as or similar to the small win rush, and a performance that is the same or similar to the small win rush is executed. The small win rush performance in this embodiment is a display in which a pattern in which a friendly character defeats weak enemy characters one after another is repeated every time a small win game is played. The opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening also reproduces the opening/closing pattern similar to the small winning game in the small winning rush. Further, the performance executed during the special game period is seamlessly continued as a small win rush performance even in the high probability low base state after the special game ends.

To explain according to the diagram, in period 660, which is the start demonstration time of the special game, a first pseudo small hit variation effect that imitates a symbol variation effect in which a small hit occurs is executed (period 700, approximately 1.4 Second), a first pseudo small win start performance imitating the start demonstration performance of a small win game is executed (period 701, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the pseudo small hit start effect, a pattern is displayed in which a weak enemy character appears on the screen. Here, period 660, which is the start demonstration time of the actual special game, ends, and period 661, which is the first unit game period of the special game, begins. Furthermore, the pseudo small hit fluctuation performance is the same as the fluctuating performance in the high probability low base state, for example, a performance where an ally character is walking while being wary of being attacked by a weak enemy character, but there is a special game. Since it is in the middle (during a unit game), the decorative symbols are hidden, the alternative symbols are also hidden, and the simple symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot (the form of "○"). (In the high probability low base state, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and alternative symbols and simple symbols are also displayed in a variable manner). This also applies to the pseudo small hit variation performance described below. In addition, while special game performances other than pseudo small hit fluctuation performances are being executed, as mentioned above, decorative symbols are hidden, alternative symbols are also hidden, and simple symbols are not displayed. is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a jackpot (a manner of "○"). Furthermore, over the period 660 to 663, a background effect corresponding to the high probability low base state is displayed.

In period 661, the big prize opening is opened in S1000, and the first pseudo small win unit game performance that imitates the unit game performance of the small win game is executed (period 702, about 3 seconds). In the pseudo small win unit game performance, a pattern of attacking a weak enemy character is displayed every time a ball enters the big prize opening. At S1001, the big prize opening is closed, and a first pseudo small winning end performance imitating the small winning game end demonstration performance is executed (period 703, about 0.5 seconds). In the pseudo-small win ending effect, when the big prize opening is closed, a weak enemy character that has already been attacked is shown exploding, and the number of balls entered or the prize is displayed when the big winning opening is opened for the first time. The number of pitches will be displayed. The above period 700 to period 703 is one pseudo small win occurrence and small win game performance, and this is repeated up to six times during two rounds of special games.

As the second pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game, a second pseudo small win variation performance is first performed (period 704), and a second pseudo small win start performance is performed (period 705). In S1002, the big prize opening is opened, and the second pseudo small hit unit game performance is executed (period 706), and in S1003, the big winning opening is closed, and the second pseudo small winning end performance is executed. It is executed (period 707).

As the third pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game, the third pseudo small win variation performance is first performed (period 708), and the third pseudo small win start performance is performed (period 709). In S1004, the big prize opening is opened, and the third pseudo small hit unit game performance is executed (period 710), and in S1005, the big winning opening is closed, and the third pseudo small winning end performance is executed. It is executed (period 711).

As the fourth pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game, first, the fourth pseudo small win variation performance is executed (period 712), and the fourth pseudo small win start performance is executed (period 713). Here, period 661, which is the unit game period of the first round of the actual special game, ends, and a period 662, which is the second unit game period of the special game, ends. In S1006, the big prize opening is opened, and the fourth pseudo small hit unit game performance is executed (period 714), and in S1007, the big winning opening is closed, and the fourth pseudo small winning end performance is executed. is executed (period 715).

As the fifth pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game, the fifth pseudo small win variation performance is first performed (period 716), and the fifth pseudo small win start performance is performed (period 717). In S1008, the big prize opening is opened, and the 5th pseudo small hit unit game performance is executed (period 718), and in S1009, the big winning opening is closed, and the 5th pseudo small winning end performance is executed. is executed (period 719).

As the 6th pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game, the 6th pseudo small win variation performance is first performed (period 720), and the 6th pseudo small win start performance is performed (period 721). In S1010, the big prize opening is opened, and the 6th pseudo small hit unit game performance is executed (period 722), and in S1011, the big winning opening is closed, and the 6th pseudo small winning end performance is executed. is executed (period 723). After this, a period 662 which is the unit game period of the second round of the actual special game ends, and a period 663 which is the end demonstration time of the special game begins.

As mentioned above, in one or more unit games out of the multiple unit games included in the special game with 2R probability-variable jackpot, multiple short openings are made during that one unit game, and the performance content is also small hit. By using the same or similar items during the rush, the entire game can be made to look like small wins and small winning games that occur multiple times in a row, similar to the small winning rush. It should be noted that jackpots other than the 2R probability-variable jackpot are only opened once during one unit game, and the performance during the special game is also different from the 2R probability-variable jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a 2R guaranteed-variable jackpot, as mentioned above, the performance content will be the same or similar throughout the final round (2R), the ending demo that moves after that, and the high probability low base state that moves after that. For example, if it is a 10R hit, the final round (10R) will introduce an ally character, and in the end demo that follows, it will announce the transition to a high-probability, high-base state, such as "Enter the hit!" is executed, and then in the high probability high base state, a performance in which the ally character runs at a sprint is performed, and the content of the performance at each timing is configured to be different.

Here, the performance and opening/closing of the big prize opening are performed based on the same performance and opening/closing pattern as the small hit rush, but since it is actually a special game with a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot, the opening and closing of the big winning opening per round is There is an upper limit (for example, 10 balls) on the number of balls entered. Therefore, it may happen that the number of balls entering the big winning hole reaches the upper limit while the pseudo small winning game is repeated three times in one round. For example, if 5 balls enter in the first opening of the first round, and 5 balls enter in the second opening, the second round will start without waiting for the third opening. In such a case, the third pseudo small win occurrence and the small win game are omitted, and the fourth pseudo small win fluctuation performance is performed in the immediately preceding period 712 based on the start timing of the second round (S1006). is executed, and a pseudo small win start performance corresponding to the fourth time is executed in a period 713, and then a large prize opening corresponding to the fourth time is opened and a pseudo small win unit game performance corresponding to the fourth time is executed from S1006. It should be noted that the opening time of the big winning hole 20 in the 2R probability variable jackpot special game (about 3 seconds) is longer than the opening time of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game (about 1 second).

At the timing of S1000 to S1011 shown in FIG. 40(b), the opening command and the closing command of the big prize opening are sent from the main board 200 to the sub board 300. The performance control means 304 executes a performance according to a command from the main board 200 as a pseudo small winning game performance, and also performs a performance according to a command from the sub CPU 310 (corresponding to the performance determination means 303) of the sub board 300. Including, if you run . For example, the performance executed when the big winning opening is opened, such as the pseudo small winning unit game performance, is executed based on the opening command of the big winning opening. Further, the effects executed when the big prize opening is closed, such as the pseudo small winning end effect and the effect rendering that causes the enemy character to explode, are executed based on the closing command of the big winning opening. Other pseudo small hit effects, such as a pseudo small win start effect, a pseudo small hit fluctuation effect, a pseudo small hit end effect, and a display effect of the number of acquired balls displayed during that time, are managed by the sub CPU 310 of the sub board 300 using a timer. Executes at a timing based on commands based on .

In addition, if the low probability low base state is scheduled to occur after the end of the special game related to the 2R jackpot (2R normal jackpot), the relative proportion of the big winning opening for each unit game in multiple unit games included in the special game Execute only one short opening. This is not an opening/closing pattern that imitates a small winning game, and a performance that pseudo-simulates a small winning game performance is not executed. In addition, in the case of a 2R variable jackpot, by relatively shortening the end performance time (end demo time) of the special game, the performance during the special game and the small hit rush performance are seamlessly integrated. , 2R normal jackpot, the time for the end effect of the special game (end demonstration time) is relatively long, and it is not integrated with the above-mentioned small win rush. For example, in the case of 2R normal jackpot, in the final round (2R), an allied character will be shown falling down, and in the end demo that follows, an effect will be shown announcing that the transition to a low-probability, high-base state will occur, such as "Chance time has entered!" is executed, and in the low-probability, high-probability base state that follows, an effect is executed in which an ally character tries to stand up, and the content of the effect at each timing is configured to be different.

<Eighth Example> Special variation effect The basic configuration of the Eighth Example is the same as the First to Seventh Examples, so we will omit the description of the common features and focus on the differences from the First to Seventh Examples. Explain.

The special fluctuating performance described in this embodiment is one of the fluctuating performances, and is a type of pseudo-continuous fluctuating performance. A so-called pseudo-continuous variation effect is known in which a plurality of symbols are displayed as if they are temporarily stopped during one symbol variation, thereby making it appear as if a plurality of symbol variations have been executed in a pseudo manner. The special variation effect of this embodiment is one of the effects similar to this pseudo continuous variation effect, but there are some differences from the normal pseudo continuous variation effect. In a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect, the symbols are displayed as if they are paused, making it appear as if the symbols are changing multiple times. In contrast, the special fluctuating performance of this embodiment is a re-fluctuation performance (first preview performance) or a high expectation performance (the first preview performance) after the execution of a specific performance that temporarily stops the performance at a predetermined timing during one variable performance period. 2) may occur. A high expectation performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than a re-fluctuation performance. When a re-fluctuation performance is executed, a re-fluctuation performance or a high expectation level performance can be further generated after execution of a specific performance that temporarily stops the performance again at a predetermined timing after the re-execution of the fluctuation performance. This makes it appear as if a pseudo pattern change has been executed multiple times. The special variation performance includes a first special variation performance and a second special variation performance, which are divided according to the difference in specific performance.

FIG. 41 is a flow diagram showing the production process of the first special variation production. When the effect is started from the start of variation 730, the specific effect may be executed at any timing of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, or 18 seconds. That is, a specific effect 731 that pauses after 2 seconds, a specific effect 732 that pauses after 6 seconds, a specific effect 733 that pauses after 10 seconds, a specific effect 734 that pauses after 14 seconds, and a specific effect that pauses after 18 seconds. There are 5 ways of 735. The specific effects 731 to 735 are, for example, effects that temporarily stop the reproduction of the entire video displayed on the screen and display a state in which the colors of the entire screen are inverted. As a pattern in which none of the specific effects 731 to 735 are executed, if the variation stops 745 after 2 seconds from the start of the variation, if the variation stops 746 after 6 seconds, if the variation stops 747 after 10 seconds, and if the variation stops 747 after 14 seconds, the variation stops after 14 seconds. If the stop 748 occurs, the fluctuation stop 749 may occur 18 seconds later.

There are three ways of development after execution of the specific performance. The first development is a development in which the re-fluctuation performance 736 is executed and the process returns to the fluctuation start 730 in order to re-execute the fluctuation performance. The second development is a development in which a high expectation level effect is executed after the button effect is executed. The third development is a development in which a high expectation level performance is executed without going through a button performance.

As a first development, a re-variation effect 736 may be executed after the specific effects 731, 732, 733, 734, 735. The re-fluctuation performance 736 is a performance that shows a video that rewinds the previously displayed performance in order to re-execute the fluctuation performance from the beginning. Since the re-fluctuation performance 736 can be executed after any of the specific performances 731, 732, 733, 734, and 735, the re-execution of the fluctuation performance can occur whether the execution timing of the specific performance is early or late.

As a second development, after the specific effects 732, 733, 734, 735, either the re-variation effects 736 or the button effects 737, 738, 739, 740 may be executed. After the specific performance 731, no button performance is executed. The button performances 737, 738, 739, and 740 are performances that prompt the player to input an operation to the performance button 109 and generate a high expectation performance or a re-variation performance in response to the operation input by the player. In the button effect, characters and button images such as "Press the button!" that urge the user to press the effect button 109 are displayed on the screen. In the button performance, a re-variation performance 736 or a high expectation performance is displayed depending on whether or not the player presses the performance button 109. However, if a button effect occurs, or if the effect button 109 is pressed, the possibility that a high expectation level effect will occur is higher than the possibility that the re-variation effect 736 will occur after the button effect occurs. It is set as follows. When a high expectation level effect occurs, the button effect 737 is followed by the high expectation level effect 741, the button effect 738 is followed by the high expectation level effect 741, the button effect 739 is followed by the high expectation level effect 741, and the button effect 740 is followed by the high expectation level effect 741. The high expectation performance 741 is executed respectively. High expectation performances 741 to 744 are variable performances such as super reach performances with high expectations for jackpots, and the high expectations are high depending on whether the specific performance is displayed at 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 14 seconds, or 18 seconds. Candidates for the level of expectation performance are also different. The configuration is such that the later the display timing of a specific performance is, the more likely it is to develop into a highly expected performance.

As a third development, high expectation effects 741, 742, 743, 744 may be executed after specific effects 732, 733, 734, 735 without going through button effects. After the specific performance 731, no high expectation performance is performed. As mentioned above, various types of high-expectation effects 741, 742, 743, and 744 are prepared as super reach effects, and the level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type, and in particular, the later the display timing of a specific effect, the higher the expectation. It is structured so that it can easily develop into a highly anticipated performance.

If the variation effect is re-executed from the start of variation 730 after the re-variation effect 736, either one of the first to third developments will be repeated again, or one of the variations will stop 745 to 749. However, per symbol variation of one special symbol, re-variation performance or re-execution of variation performance may be limited to two times or the like.

The time from the start of variation 730 to the specific effect or stop of variation is 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, and 18 seconds, and there are various combinations depending on whether or not the variation effect is re-executed and the destination of development. Variable performance patterns are prepared for each type of development, and any one of them can be selected by the performance determining means 303.

FIG. 42 is a flow diagram showing the production process of the second special variation production. The second special variation performance is a variation performance pattern that is a variation of the first special variation performance, and is particularly different in development after the specific performance is displayed. If the effect is started from the start of variation 750, the specific effect may be executed at a timing of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. That is, there are two types: a specific effect 751 that pauses after 2 seconds, and a specific effect 755 that pauses after 6 seconds. Different from the specific effects 731 to 735 in FIG. 41, the specific effects 751 and 755 are effects in which the temporary stop time of the variable effect exceeds a predetermined time, and the longer the duration of the pause, the higher the probability that a high expectation level effect will occur. is set to be high. For example, this is an effect in which the playback of the entire video displayed on the screen is temporarily stopped, the colors of the entire screen are inverted, and the stopped state is maintained for several seconds to more than 10 seconds (a so-called frozen state). The specific performance 751 has three stop times: 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds, and the specific performance 755 has three stop times: 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 16 seconds. If the specific effects 751, 755 are not displayed, the variation is stopped 759.

When the specific effect 751 is displayed, if the frozen state continues for 4 seconds and then develops into the high expectation level effect 752, if the frozen state continues for 8 seconds and then develops into the high expectation level effect 753, the frozen state becomes 16. After continuing for seconds, it may develop into a high expectation performance 754. Various types of high expectation performances 752, 753, and 754 are available as super reach performances, and the level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type, and in particular, the longer the frozen state is, the higher the expectation level is. It is configured to be easy to use. In addition, when the specific effect 755 is displayed, if the frozen state continues for 4 seconds and then develops into the high expectation level effect 756, if the frozen state continues for 8 seconds and then develops into the high expectation level effect 757, the frozen state After this continues for 16 seconds, it may develop into a high expectation performance 758. High expectation performances 756, 757, and 758 are available in various types as super reach performances, and the level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type, and in particular, the longer the frozen state is, the higher the expectation level is. It is configured to be easy to use. In addition, the high expectation performances 752 to 754 and 756 to 758 include high expectation performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the high expectation performances 756 to 758 in FIG. A high expectation performance that develops through a frozen state is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot is more likely to increase than a high expectation performance that develops through a freeze state. As a modified example, if the high expectation performance that develops after the freeze state is a specific high expectation performance (for example, only if it is super reach performance E among super reach performances A to E), the jackpot is confirmed. It may be configured to do so.

Here, the end timing of the temporary stop (freeze state) of the specific effects 751 and 755 is synchronized with the timing of occurrence of any of the specific effects 731 to 735 in FIG. In other words, the specific effect 751 that occurs 2 seconds after the start of variation 750 will be synchronized with the specific effect 732 that occurs 6 seconds after the start of variation 730 if the freeze continues for 4 seconds, and if the freeze continues for 8 seconds. It will be synchronized with a specific effect 733 that occurs 10 seconds after the start of variation 730, and if the freeze continues for 16 seconds, it will be synchronized with a specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of variation 730. In addition, the specific effect 755 that occurs 6 seconds after the start of variation 750 will be synchronized with the specific effect 733 that occurs 10 seconds after the start of variation 730 if the freeze continues for 4 seconds, and if the freeze continues for 8 seconds It will be synchronized with a specific effect 734 that occurs 14 seconds after the start of variation 730, and if the freeze continues for 12 seconds, it will be synchronized with a specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of variation 730. In this way, performance patterns whose display end timings of at least specific performances are synchronized have a common variation time, and therefore may be associated with the same pattern as a variation pattern of special symbols. In this way, various combinations are possible due to differences in the time from the start of fluctuation 750 to a specific performance and differences in the duration of the frozen state, and variable performance patterns are prepared for each type of development, and one of them is determined. can be selected by means 303.

As described above, the earlier the specific performance occurs, the lower the possibility that a button performance or a high expectation performance will occur, but the higher the possibility that a re-variation performance will occur. More specifically, if the time from the start of fluctuation or re-execution of the fluctuation performance to the pause is relatively short, there is a possibility that a button performance (high expectation performance or re-fluctuation performance will occur after it occurs) Alternatively, the setting is made so that the probability of occurrence of a high expectation performance is low, but the probability of occurrence of a re-fluctuation performance is high. Conversely, the later the specific performance occurs, the less likely the button performance or re-variation performance will occur, but the higher the possibility that a high expectation performance will occur. More specifically, if the time from the start of variation or re-execution of the effect to pause is relatively long, the button effect The setting is such that there is a possibility that a re-fluctuation effect or a high-expectation level effect will occur after the occurrence of a re-variation effect, or a setting is made such that the possibility of a re-variation effect occurring is low but the possibility of a high-expectation level effect occurring is high (for example, button effects or Comparing the rate at which re-fluctuation effects occur and the rate at which high-expectation level effects occur, (1) If the time from start of variation or re-execution of production to pause is relatively long, the ratio is 3:7; (2) If the time from the start or re-execution of the production to the pause is relatively short, set it to 8:2; (2) If the time from the start of variation or the re-execution of the production to the pause is relatively long, set it to 6:4. , if the time from the start of fluctuation or re-execution of the performance to the pause is relatively short, the ratio is set to 9:1). In this way, the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of occurrence of the specific performance and the duration of the pause, and an innovative performance can be realized in which the player pays attention to the slow timing of the occurrence of the specific performance and the length of the duration. However, as shown in FIG. 41, from the specific effect 731 that occurs two seconds after the start of variation 730, it does not develop into a button effect or high expectation effect, while as shown in FIG. 42, from the start of variation 750 There are exceptions such as a specific performance 751 that occurs after a minimum of 2 seconds that can develop into a highly anticipated performance even if the specific performance occurs at a short timing. , giving the production a sense of surprise. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that even from the specific effect 731 that occurs two seconds after the start of variation 730, it can develop into a button effect or a highly anticipated effect with a low probability. Further, as a modification of the temporary stop (freeze state) in the specific performance, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or hidden during freezing, while the alternative pattern or simple pattern may continue to fluctuate. As another modified example, while the reserved ball image is not displayed during freezing, the reserved number image may be continuously displayed. In that case, even if a new ball enters the first starting port 11 (or second starting port 12) in a situation where the number of balls pending in the first lottery (or the number pending in the second lottery) is less than four. , the held ball image corresponding to the held first winning/failure drawing (or the held ball image of the held second winning/failure drawing) will not be newly displayed after the entry of the ball, but The corresponding pending number image (or the pending number image corresponding to the second win/fail lottery) is updated and displayed (for example, the display of "3" is updated to the display of "4"). The pending ball image indicates the number of pending first winning/failure drawings (or second winning/failure drawings) by the number of graphic icons (0 to 4) such as star-shaped or round shapes. displayed at the bottom. The pending number image indicates the number of the first winning lottery (or the second winning lottery) with a single number (any number "0", "1", "2", "3", "4") For example, it is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

In addition, for example, a combination of 10 seconds and 14 seconds, a combination of 6 seconds and 18 seconds, a combination of 14 seconds and 10 seconds, a combination of 18 seconds and 6 seconds, the total time is 24 seconds, and the corresponding special symbol The variation pattern is associated with the same 24-second variation pattern, and the effect determining means 303 determines which combination to use.

<Ninth Example> Special Variation Effect Since the basic configuration of the ninth example is the same as the first to eighth examples, the description of the common points will be omitted, and The explanation will focus on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

When designing a design in which multiple types of variable performance patterns with different jackpot expectations or unsuccessful variable performance patterns are made to correspond to a common variation pattern, such as the special variation performance explained in the eighth embodiment, the number of types of variation patterns is suppressed. On the other hand, it is not easy to design a method for selecting each of a plurality of types of variable performance patterns so that each has a different jackpot expectation level. Therefore, in this embodiment, by constructing a variation pattern by combining multiple types of basic variation patterns and multiple types of variation additional patterns, various variation times can be configured by combination while suppressing the number of patterns themselves. By separating the choices and selection probabilities of performance patterns, even fluctuating patterns with the same fluctuating time can be selected with different probabilities. That is, even for a combination of a variation pattern and a variation addition pattern that have the same variation time, the selection probability is made to differ depending on which table the variation addition pattern is selected based on. Thereby, even if the variation pattern (variation time) is the same, the jackpot expectation level can be made to differ depending on the performance pattern selected. The variation pattern corresponding to the special variation effect explained in the eighth embodiment is a combination of adding the variation additional time of one of the plurality of variation addition patterns to the variation time of one of the plurality of basic variation patterns. configured.

FIG. 43 is a table diagram schematically illustrating the correspondence between the types of basic variation patterns and the types of variation additional pattern tables. The basic variation pattern shown in this figure is an example for explaining a variation pattern that particularly corresponds to a special variation effect pattern. The plurality of types of basic variation patterns include a plurality of patterns having common variation performance contents and variation times. Fluctuation pattern number "0" is the basic fluctuation pattern of "ultra shortening fluctuation", fluctuation pattern number "1" is the basic fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation", and fluctuation pattern number "2" is the basic fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". It is a fluctuating pattern. These basic fluctuation patterns are selected when the result is off, and they are associated with "0" as the fluctuation additional pattern table number, and as a result of referring to the fluctuation additional pattern table numbered "0", the fluctuation additional pattern is added. (Details of the variation addition pattern table will be described later). As the basic variation pattern, one of these "super shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" is selected depending on the number of reserved pitches. For example, when the number of held balls decreases from 4 to 3, "super shortening variation" is selected, and when the number of held balls decreases from 3 to 2, "shortening variation" is selected, and the number of held balls decreases from 2 to 1. and when it decreases from 1 to 0, "normal variation" is selected. For example, even if the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is the same predetermined value, the basic fluctuation pattern will differ depending on the number of balls held at that time (any of "super shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation") can be selected.

On the other hand, basic variation patterns "A" to "K" with variation pattern numbers "3" to "13" are variation patterns corresponding to special variation effect patterns. Basic fluctuation patterns "A" to "K" do not have different selection probabilities depending on the number of balls on hold; one of the basic fluctuation patterns is selected according to the lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold. be done. The basic variation patterns "A" and "B" correspond to the same performance type, but each has a different variation time as the basic variation pattern. The same variable addition pattern table numbered "1" is associated with these, and one of the plurality of types of variable addition patterns is selected based on the same table. As a result, even for the same production type, multiple variations of the variation time can be selected depending on the combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern, and even if the same variation addition pattern is added to the basic variation patterns "A" and "B", However, since the basic fluctuation patterns "A" and "B" have different fluctuation times and different selection probabilities, they can suggest different jackpot expectations.

The basic variation patterns "C" and "D" correspond to the production content with character A as the motif, and the variation patterns "E" and "F" correspond to the production content with character B as the motif, as well as variations as the basic variation pattern. times are different from each other. The basic variation patterns "C" and "D" are associated with the variation additional pattern table No. 2, and the basic variation patterns "E" and "F" are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 3. There is. Although the basic fluctuation patterns "C", "D", "E", and "F" have different fluctuation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total fluctuation time is the same depending on the added fluctuation pattern. However, the selection probability differs for each basic fluctuation pattern, and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern also differs depending on the fluctuation addition pattern table referred to, so depending on these combinations, even for the same fluctuation time, the jackpot expectation may differ. can be suggested.

The basic variation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" correspond to the performance content with the character C as a motif, and the variation times as the basic variation patterns are different from each other. Further, the basic variation patterns "G" and "H" are associated with the variation additional pattern table numbered "4", and the basic variation patterns "I" and "J" are associated with the variation additional pattern table numbered "5". It is being Although the basic fluctuation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" have different fluctuation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total fluctuation time is the same depending on the added fluctuation pattern. However, the selection probability differs for each basic fluctuation pattern, and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern also differs depending on the fluctuation addition pattern table referred to, so depending on these combinations, even for the same fluctuation time, the jackpot expectation may differ. can be suggested.

The basic variation pattern "K" corresponds to the performance content using the character D as a motif, and is associated with the variation additional pattern table numbered "6". Depending on the added variation pattern, the basic variation pattern "K" may have the same total variation time as the combination of the basic variation patterns "A" to "J" and the variation addition pattern. However, the selection probability differs for each basic fluctuation pattern, and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern also differs depending on the fluctuation addition pattern table referred to, so depending on these combinations, even for the same fluctuation time, the jackpot expectation may differ. can be suggested.

FIG. 44 is a table diagram schematically illustrating the correspondence between the types of variable addition patterns and the types of variable addition pattern tables. In this figure, 30 types of variable addition patterns from "0" to "29" are illustrated in each row. Each column from “Table 0” to “Table 6” corresponds to the variable additional pattern tables numbered “0” to “6”, and the size of the lottery value range assigned to each variable additional pattern in each table. The value (number of values) is shown in each column. Among the 30 types of variation addition patterns, the variation addition patterns "6" to "29" are patterns indicating the number, timing, and type of re-variation effects or button effects, respectively.

When "super shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table numbered "0" is selected in the variation pattern table in FIG. 43, the variation addition pattern table numbered "0" in FIG. With reference to , a variation addition pattern with variation addition number "0" (here, "none", a variation addition pattern with a variation time of zero) is selected with a selection probability of 100%. In other words, the variable addition pattern is not added.

When "Variation A" and "Variation B" corresponding to the variation additional pattern table numbered "1" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. Variable addition patterns with addition numbers "0" to "5" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "1" to "5" correspond to "performance A" to "performance E", and the selection probabilities differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Rendering A" is 30/256, while the selection probability of "Rendering C" is 70/256. "Production A" to "Production E" are variable addition patterns that correspond to performances that lead to high expectation performance or fluctuation stop without going through re-fluctuation production or button production in the special variation production pattern, and the duration of each added production. are different.

When "Variation C" and "Variation D" corresponding to the variation additional pattern table numbered "2" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. Variable addition patterns with addition numbers "6" to "9" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "6" to "9" correspond to "specific once A" to "specific once D", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Specific once A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "Specific once C" is 110/256. “Specific 1 time A” to “Specific 1 time D” are variation addition patterns that correspond to productions that go through a re-variation production or button production once and then reach a high expectation production or a variation stop in the special variation production pattern. , the timing and type of re-fluctuation effect or button effect are different, and the added effect time is also different.

When "Fluctuation E" and "Fluctuation F" corresponding to the variation additional pattern table numbered "3" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. Variable addition patterns with addition numbers "6" to "15" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "6" to "15" correspond to "specific once A" to "specific once J", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Specific 1 time A" is 7/256, while the selection probability of "Specific 1 time C" is 64/256, and the selection probability of "Specific 1 time J" is 7/256. be. "Specific 1 time A" to "Specific 1 time J" are variation addition patterns corresponding to productions that go through a re-variation production or button production once and then reach a high expectation production or a variation stop in the special variation production pattern. , the timing and type of re-fluctuation effect or button effect are different, and the added effect time is also different.

When "Variation G" and "Variation H" corresponding to the variation additional pattern table numbered "4" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. Variable addition patterns with addition numbers "16" to "22" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "16" to "22" correspond to "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Specific 2 times A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "Specific 2 times E" is 55/256, and the selection probability of "Specific 2 times G" is 85/256. be. “Specific 2 times A” to “Specific 2 times G” are fluctuation addition patterns that correspond to performances that go through re-fluctuation production or button production twice and reach high expectation production or fluctuation stop in special variation production patterns. , the timing and type of re-fluctuation effect or button effect are different, and the added effect time is also different.

When "Variation I" and "Variation J" corresponding to the variation additional pattern table numbered "5" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. Variable addition patterns with addition numbers "24" to "29" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "24" to "29" correspond to "specific 3 times A" to "specific 3 times G", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Specific 3 times A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "Specific 3 times E" is 60/256, and the selection probability of "Specific 3 times G" is 79/256. be. “Specified 3 times A” to “Specified 3 times G” are fluctuation addition patterns that correspond to performances that go through re-fluctuation performances or button performances three times and reach a high expectation performance or a fluctuation stop in the special fluctuation performance pattern. , the timing and type of re-fluctuation effect or button effect are different, and the added effect time is also different.

When "variation K" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" is selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation addition number "0" is selected with reference to the variation addition pattern table number "6" of FIG. ” to “29” are selected with their respective selection probabilities. These total variation addition patterns have different selection probabilities depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Production A" is 7/256, while the selection probability of "Specific 1 time J" is 20/256. This variation addition pattern table numbered "6" is prepared to adjust the selection probabilities of all variation effects and to realize an appropriate suggestion of jackpot expectation according to the result of the judgment for each variation effect. Since all of the variation addition patterns in Figure 44 are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 6 as options, all of these variation addition patterns are always duplicated in multiple variation addition pattern tables. This means that they are associated with each other. Also, for example, the variation addition pattern numbered "15" with "specific one time J" has a selection probability of 3/256 in the variation addition pattern table numbered "3", whereas the variation addition pattern numbered "6" has a selection probability of 3/256. Different selection probabilities are set in the pattern table, such as a selection probability of 20/256. Therefore, even the same variable addition pattern can suggest different jackpot expectation levels, and it is possible to appropriately provide differences in jackpot expectation levels for each performance. The combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation additional pattern selected based on the tables illustrated in FIGS. 43 and 44 is an example selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 in the low probability low base state. It is only an exceptional case that the symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol 52, which is not the main character, is executed in the low probability low base state. Also, in the second game, the small hit occurs with a high probability, so the small hit is It is also possible that an attempt is made to fraudulently obtain a prize ball by intentionally causing this to occur. Therefore, after setting the variation time of the basic variation pattern corresponding to the small win to 8 minutes, for example, one of the variation addition patterns is determined and added by referring to the variation addition pattern table No. 6. The variation addition patterns with variation addition numbers "0" to "29" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table No. 6 have different time values, and 30 types of variation time can be set in the form of 8 minutes + α. . As a result, the randomness of the fluctuation time can be ensured, and the fluctuation time can be appropriately distributed so that the fluctuation time when a small hit is not always constant, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 stops. Since it is difficult to ascertain the timing, it is possible to prevent inappropriate operations by the player such as aiming the ball into the second starting port 12 at certain timings.

Based on the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 and the variation addition pattern table of FIG. 44, a combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern is selected. Specifically, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects a plurality of types of basic fluctuations corresponding to the result of the validity determination by lottery based on the basic fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the result of the validity determination. Select one of the patterns. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation additional patterns corresponding to the basic fluctuation pattern by lottery based on the fluctuation additional pattern table corresponding to the selected basic fluctuation pattern. Select. At least one of the plurality of types of basic variation patterns is defined in the basic variation pattern table so as to have a different selection probability depending on the result of the validity determination. At least one of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns is defined in the plurality of variation addition pattern tables so that the selection probability differs depending on which of the plurality of variation addition pattern tables it is based on.

Here, if "variation K" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the performance content will be based on the character D as a motif, as described above. "Variation K" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 30:70. As the variation addition pattern, any variation addition pattern is selected with a selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table No. 6 in FIG. 44, regardless of whether it is correct or not. No matter which variable addition pattern is selected, in other words, no matter which effect is selected from "Production A" to "Production E" or "Specific 1 time A" to "Specific 3 times G" ("Specific 1 There is no difference in the expectation level of jackpot even if ``time A'' is selected or whether ``specific 3 times G'' is selected. The "probability of being selected at the time of jackpot" as used herein is (jackpot probability x probability of "variation K" being selected at the time of jackpot), and refers to the appearance rate of "variation K" corresponding to the jackpot. Further, the "probability of being selected when the result is off" is (probability of being off)×probability that "variation K" is selected when being off, and refers to the appearance rate of "variation K" corresponding to the off chance. For example, the jackpot probability is 1/100, the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of jackpot is 297/1000, the probability of losing is 99/100, and the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of winning is 7/1000. In some cases, the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 30:70. It should be noted that the terms "probability of being selected when winning the jackpot" and "probability of being selected when losing" have the same meanings (although the basic fluctuation patterns to be selected are different).

On the other hand, when "Variation C" or "Variation D" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the performance content is based on the character A as a motif, as described above. "Variation C" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss is 10:90, while "Variation D" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss is 10:90. The ratio of the probabilities is 20:80. Note that "variation D" may or may not be longer than "variation C". Then, in either case, one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table No. 2 in FIG. 44, so it is better to use "variation D" as the basic variation pattern. The expectation of a jackpot is higher than when "Fluctuation C" is the basic fluctuation pattern, but no matter which fluctuation additional pattern is selected, in other words, "Performance A" to "Performance E" or "Specific one-time A" to No matter which effect of "Specific 3 times G" is selected (even if "Specific 1 time A" or "Specific 3 times G" is selected), the relationship remains the same. In other words, the reliability will differ depending on the production based on the basic variation pattern (for example, "variation C" corresponds to a production in which character A wears a blue aura, but "variation D" corresponds to a production in which character A wears a blue aura). Corresponds to the effect that changes the color of the aura to red over time after being wrapped in an aura).

Furthermore, when "variation G" or "variation I" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the performance content is based on the character C as a motif, as described above. "Variation G" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 30:70, while "Variation I" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss is 30:70. The ratio of the probabilities is 60:40. Note that "variation I" may or may not be longer than "fluctuation G". Then, if "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table numbered "4" in FIG. 44, while if it is "variation I", then One of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table numbered "5". In other words, even though the same character C is used as a motif, "variation I" can increase the number of times a specific effect (re-variation effect, button effect, etc.) occurs. If you want to design a design so that the higher the number of occurrences of a specific effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, by adopting this relationship between the basic fluctuation pattern and the additional fluctuation pattern, even if the same character C is used as a motif. Among the performances executed based on the variable addition pattern, performances with high expectations for jackpots (in this case, a performance mode in which a large number of specific performances are executed) can be associated with basic fluctuation patterns that have high expectations for jackpots, and such combinations By increasing the selection probability, it is possible to link the performance content of the preview performance (specific performance) and the actual jackpot expectation level. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation addition pattern tables corresponding to "variation G" and "variation I" are such that the same variation addition number (same variation addition pattern) is never selected ( For example, for specific 2 times A, it can only be selected in the variation additional pattern table numbered "4", so it will not be selected if "variation I" is the basic variation pattern), but "variation G" and "variation I" The corresponding variation addition pattern table may be a table in which the same variation addition number (the same variation addition pattern) can be selected. For example, in both of the variation addition pattern tables corresponding to "variation G" and "variation I", if any of "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G" is made a selectable table, " "Variation G" makes it easier to select variation addition patterns such as "Specific 2 times A" and "Specific 2 times B", and "Variation G" makes it easy to select variation addition patterns such as "Specific 2 times G" and "Specific 2 times G". The pattern may be made easier to select. In that case, the closer the alphabetical part such as "Specific 2 times A" or "Specific 2 times G" is to "G" (later in alphabetical order, that is, larger in ascending order), the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect, in other words. It is desirable that the performance has a high expectation of a jackpot.

In the modified example, when "variation G", "variation I", and "fluctuation K" are selected as the basic variation patterns, the performance content is based on the character X, which is a common character. "Variation G" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss is 70:30, and the "variation I" is configured such that the probability of being selected at a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss. The "variation K" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 50:50. In the case of "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table numbered "4", and in the case of "variation I", the selection shown in the variation addition pattern table numbered "5" is selected. One of the variation addition patterns is selected with probability, and in the case of "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table numbered "6".

Here, for the variation addition patterns from "Specific 2 times A" to "Specific 2 times G" whose variation addition numbers are "16" to "22", the later in the alphabetical order the later the specific effect occurs. However, the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on which basic fluctuation pattern it is added to. In the case of "specific 2 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "4" in correspondence with "variation G" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas "variation As shown in the figure, the probability of selection by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in correspondence with "K" is 7/256. In addition, in the case of "specific 2 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "4" in correspondence with "variation G" is 85/256 as shown in the figure. As shown in the figure, the probability of selection by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in correspondence with "variation K" is 7/256. Here, as mentioned above, "variation G" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot to the probability of being selected at a miss is 70:30, and "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot. It is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected when it is off is 50:50, so even if the same variation addition pattern is selected, it is more likely to be added to "variation G" than "variation K". It can be configured so that the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot is higher than when it is added, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Furthermore, if the structure is configured so that the jackpot expectation is higher when "Specified 2 times G" is added than when "Specified 2 times A" is added ("Specific 2 times A" or "Specific 2 times A" or "Specific 2 times G"). The closer the alphabet part such as "G" is to "G" (the later it is in the alphabetical order), the larger it is in ascending order, the later the timing of the occurrence of the specific performance, in other words, the performance is configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is high) , "Variation G" and "Variation K" have the same character X as a motif, but "Specific 2" is a variation addition pattern with a small difference in selection rate between "Variation G" and "Variation K". ``Specific 2 times '' can be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern + variation additional pattern) for executing performance contents with character X as a motif is higher. This is because the probability of being selected at the time of the jackpot is higher if the variation pattern is constructed by selecting the variation addition pattern in "Fluctuation G" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 70:30. It is clear that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a variation pattern is constructed by selecting a variation addition pattern in "variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 50:50 (the former is a jackpot The expectation level is 70%, and the latter has a jackpot expectation level of 50%), and the jackpot expectation level is 70 even if "Specific 2 times A" is added to "Fluctuating G" or "Specific 2 times G" is added. %, and even if "2 specific times A" is added to "variation K" or "2 specific times G" is added, the jackpot expectation is 50%, but as a player, the jackpot expectation is 70%. Since it is not known whether "Variation G" with a jackpot expectation of 50% or "Variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is selected (because the performance content is the same regardless of either), the jackpot expectation that the player feels As for the performance with the motif of character Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 2 times A" is selected with "variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12:7, it is approximately 63%, Regarding the production with the motif of character Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific twice G" is selected with "variation K" of % is 85:7, it is approximately 68%.

Also, for the variation addition patterns from "Specific 3 times A" to "Specific 3 times G" whose variation addition numbers are "23" to "29", the later in the alphabetical order the later the specific effect occurs. However, the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on which basic fluctuation pattern it is added to. In the case of "specific 3 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "5" in correspondence with "variation I" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas "variation As shown in the figure, the probability of selection by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in correspondence with "K" is 7/256. In addition, in the case of "specific 3 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "5" in correspondence with "variation I" is 79/256 as shown in the figure. As shown in the figure, the probability of selection by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in correspondence with "variation K" is 7/256. Here, as mentioned above, "variation I" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at a miss is 90:10, and "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of error is 50:50, even if the same variation addition pattern is selected, the probability of being selected when it is added to "variation I" is higher than "variation K". It can be configured so that the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot is higher than when it is added, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Furthermore, if the structure is configured so that the jackpot expectation level is higher when "specific 3 times G" is added than when "specific 3 times A" is added ("specific 3 times A" or "specific 3 times The closer the alphabet part such as "G" is to "G" (the later it is in the alphabetical order), the larger it is in ascending order, the later the timing of the occurrence of the specific performance, in other words, the performance is configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is high) , "Variation I" and "Variation K" have the same character X as a motif, but "Specific 3" is a variation addition pattern with a small difference in selection rate between "Variation I" and "Variation K". "Specific 3 times G" is a variation addition pattern where the difference in selection rate between "Variation I" and "Variation K" is larger than when "Variation A" is selected ("Variation I" is very likely to be selected). '' can be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern + variation additional pattern) for executing performance contents with character X as a motif is higher. This is because the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot and the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 90:10, and the probability of being selected at the time of a jackpot is higher when a variation pattern is selected and a variation pattern is constructed in "Fluctuation I". It is clear that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a variation pattern is constructed by selecting a variation addition pattern in "variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 50:50 (the former is a jackpot The expectation level is 90%, and the latter has a jackpot expectation level of 50%), and even if "specific 3 times A" is added to "variation I" or "specific 3 times G" is added, the jackpot expectation level is 90. %, and even if "specific 3 times A" is added to "variation K" or "specific 3 times G" is added, the jackpot expectation is 50%, but as a player, the jackpot expectation is 90%. Since it is not known whether "Fluctuation I" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is selected or "Fluctuation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is selected (because the performance content is the same regardless of either), the jackpot expectation that the player feels As for the performance with the motif of character Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 3 times A" is selected with "variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12:7, it is approximately 75%, and "specific 3 times G" is selected. Regarding the production with the motif of character Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 3 times G" is selected with "variation K" of % is 79:7, it is approximately 87%.

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot or small hit, the fluctuation of any one of the multiple types of fluctuation additional patterns for the fluctuation time of any of the multiple types of basic fluctuation patterns. An additional time may be added, and a predetermined additional time (a time different from the variable additional time) may be added. The additional time is, for example, 3 minutes, and in the case of a jackpot, it functions as an additional time to secure time to perform a performance to celebrate the jackpot, and in the case of a small win, it functions as an additional time to further extend the variable time. It functions as time. Regarding this additional time, it is not limited to just one type of 3 minutes, but the time value may be different depending on the basic fluctuation pattern (for example, if the basic fluctuation pattern when winning a jackpot is fluctuation A or B, it is set to 2 minutes, If the basic fluctuation pattern when hitting a jackpot is fluctuation K, the selection rate of multiple types of time values may be different depending on the basic fluctuation pattern (for example, if the basic fluctuation pattern when hitting a jackpot is 3 minutes). For fluctuations A and B, 2 minutes will be selected at 30%, 3 minutes will be selected at 70%, and if the basic fluctuation pattern for a jackpot is fluctuation K, 2 minutes will be selected at 60%, and 3 minutes will be selected at 60%. 40%, etc.). Note that no additional time is added in the case of a miss. Moreover, the plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns include fluctuation patterns that can be selected even if the result of the success/failure determination corresponds to either a jackpot or a loss. The variation patterns that can be selected include: if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the additional time of one of the multiple types of variation addition patterns is added to the variation time, and if the result of the judgment is a loss, the addition time of the variation addition pattern is added to the variation time. Additional time may not be added to variable time. Among multiple types of fluctuation patterns, only one predetermined type of fluctuation addition pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the performance that leads to a jackpot after going through the re-fluctuation performance, whereas A plurality of types of variable additional patterns are associated with the variable pattern corresponding to the performance leading to the jackpot as addable variable additional patterns.

<10th Example> Special Variation Effect Since the basic configuration of the 10th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 9th Examples, the description of the common points will be omitted, and the The explanation will focus on the differences from the seventh embodiment.

In the high base state, there is no reach, and by continuously repeating short-term symbol fluctuations with short-term fluctuations and short-term fluctuations, the fluctuations are continuous at a constant tempo. However, in a high base state, the second game is mainly aimed at hitting the ball into the second starting hole 12 by hitting the ball to the right, so there is a possibility that a small hit will occur (or the first game (The probability of a small hit is higher than that of a small win), and if a small win unexpectedly occurs in between, the tempo or rhythm of continuous fluctuations in losses will be disrupted, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by aligning the time required for the small winning fluctuation and the small winning game in the high base state with the time for the missing fluctuation, the tempo or rhythm is prevented from being disturbed. In the symbol fluctuation in the high base state of the present embodiment, the time from the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol to the start of the next fluctuation even if the result of the determination by the second validity determining means 222 corresponds to either a small hit or a loss. (Hereinafter, the time during which the stopped symbols are fixed is also simply referred to as the "symbol fixing time") is constant (however, it is assumed that the next variation is pending).

FIG. 45 is a time chart that compares the time of small winning fluctuation stop and small winning game with the time of losing fluctuation. (a) shows the time for stopping small winning fluctuations and small winning games in a high base state, and (b) shows the time for stopping normal fluctuations in a high base state. (c) shows the time for stopping small winning fluctuations and small winning games in a low base state, and (d) shows the time for stopping normal fluctuations in a low base state. Although not shown, the period of small hit fluctuation in FIG. 45(a) and the period of normal out-of-win fluctuation in FIG. 45(b) are the same time.

The decorative pattern related to the second special pattern 52 has a high base when the first time is the pattern fixing time in which the pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern mode indicating a small win, that is, the stop duration from the pattern stop to the start of the small win game. In the state, the symbol fixing time that is stopped and displayed in a symbol mode that indicates something other than a small hit (for example, a normal miss without a reach effect) is the same time as the first time plus the time for the small hit game, and here, It will be 2 hours. First, in FIG. 45(a), a period 770 is a small winning symbol fixing time (first time) in a high base state, and is, for example, 0.02 seconds. The combined period of periods 772, 774, and 776 is the time of the small winning game, and is, for example, 1.084 seconds. In FIG. 45(b), a period 778 is an unusual symbol fixing time (second time) without reach effect in a high base state, and the second time is the first time (for example, 0.02 seconds) and the small winning game. It is equal to the sum (for example, 1.104 seconds) of time (the period of time 772, 774, and 776 combined, for example, 1.084 seconds).

Here, the time of the small winning game in the high base state of FIG. This is the sum of a period 776 (fifth time, for example 0.04 seconds) which is time, and a period 774 (sixth time, for example 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small winning game. The period 774, which is the execution time of the small winning game, is, for example, the sum of the opening time (time to keep the opening) of the big winning opening 1.000 seconds and the closing time (time required for closing) 0.004 seconds.

As a result, even when small hits and regular misses are mixed alternately and consecutively in a high base state, the fluctuating effect is carved at the same tempo, so the player does not feel unnecessary discomfort, and it is natural that small hits and regular misses are not distinguished. It can be made into a performance.

In addition, in FIG. 45(c), the period 780 is the symbol fixing time for a small hit in the low base state, and is the same time (for example, 0.02 seconds) as the period 770 (the symbol fixing time for the small win in the high base state). . The combined period of periods 782, 784, and 786 is the time for the small winning game in the low base state, which is longer than the small winning time in the high base state, for example, 1.5 seconds. In FIG. 45(d), period 788 is an unusual symbol fixing time without a reach effect in a low base state, which is shorter than the unusual symbol fixing time (second time) without a reach effect in a high base state. (3rd time, for example 0.5 seconds). The time of the small winning game in the low base state is the period 782 (7th time different from the 4th time, for example 0.1 seconds) which is the start demonstration time of the small winning game, and the period which is the end demonstration time of the small winning game. 786 (eighth time different from the fifth time, for example 0.396 seconds) and period 784 (sixth time, for example 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small winning game. In this way, the time for stopping small winning fluctuations and playing small winning games in the low base state (Fig. 45(c)) is longer than the time for stopping small winning fluctuations and playing small winning games in the high base state (Fig. 45(a)). . Further, the time for stopping normal fluctuations in the low base state (FIG. 45(d)) is shorter than the time for stopping normal fluctuations in the high base state (FIG. 45(b)). Therefore, the time for stopping small winning fluctuations and playing small winning games in the low base state (FIG. 45(c)) and the time for stopping normal fluctuations in the low base state (FIG. 45(d)) do not match.

As a modified example, if the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol 52 corresponds to a small hit in the high base state, the reach effect or the battle effect is not performed, while the judgment regarding the second special symbol 52 in the high base state is performed. If the result is a failure, a reach performance or a battle performance may be executed. In this case, the symbol fixing time for the out-of-win variation of the second special symbol 52 that executes the reach effect or battle effect of a miss in the high base state, and the symbol fixing time for the small hit variation of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. It is preferable that the period is the same time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and in the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol 52 that executes the reach effect or battle effect of missing in a high base state. It is preferable that the temporary stop time before the fixed stop is longer than the temporary stop time before the fixed stop in the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. Here, the total value of the temporary stop time and symbol fixing time when executing the reach effect or battle effect (the time from the start of the change to the start of the next change when the change is a losing change) is the reach effect The total value of the temporary stop time, symbol fixing time, and execution time of the small hit game when the battle effect is not executed (when the fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation, the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation) It is more preferable to use the same or almost the same time value, and by configuring it in this way, in a variable display that does not perform reach effects or battle effects, even if the small winning play time is included, "from the stop of variation to the next The "time until the fluctuation starts" can be the same or almost the same as the winning fluctuation, and if the small hit fluctuation is continuous, the temporary stop time is short, so the tempo can be kept, and the tempo can be kept up, and the reach performance and battle performance In a variable display with a long performance time, such as this, there is no discomfort even if the temporary stop time is increased (because the tempo is temporarily disrupted during reach performance or battle performance).

<Eleventh Example> Update of background display Since the basic configuration of the eleventh example is the same as the first to tenth examples, the description of the common points will be omitted and the differences with the first to tenth examples will be omitted. I will mainly explain.

In the low probability low base state 620 of FIG. 33, the first game is mainly based on the symbol fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 by left-handed hitting, while the high base state (low probability high base state 622 and high probability high base state 624) and the high probability low base state 626, the second game is mainly based on the symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the low probability low base state 620, the background display on the screen of the effect display device 60 is updated when the first special symbol 51 starts changing or stops changing, and the background display on the screen of the effect display device 60 is updated. As a general rule, the background display is not updated when the start or stop of fluctuation occurs. On the other hand, in the high base state (low probability high base state 622 and high probability high base state 624) and high probability low base state 626, the background is triggered by at least one of the start of fluctuation and the stop of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52. In principle, the display is updated, and the background display is not updated when the first special symbol 51 starts and stops changing.

The background display is one of the elements constituting the production mode or production stage, and background images are determined for each of a plurality of types of production modes or production stages. Depending on which of a plurality of types of background images is displayed, it is indicated which production mode or production stage the device is in. Multiple types of background images differ in elements such as scenery, character types, colors, patterns, etc. that are displayed as images, and by looking at the characteristics of the background images, it is possible to determine which production mode or production stage the user is in. It is structured in such a way that it can be associated. Note that updating the background display and displaying the background image in each performance stage is also referred to as "stage drawing."

FIG. 46 shows the relationship between the gaming state and the performance stage. In this embodiment, the game and performance progress by switching between a plurality of performance stages for each game state. For example, the low probability low base state 620 includes at least two stages, from production stage A that displays background image A with character A as a motif, to production stage B that displays background image B with character B as a motif. can be switched to The low-probability-high base state 622 also includes at least two stages, and is switched from a presentation stage C in which a background image C is displayed to a presentation stage D in which a background image D is displayed. The high-probability high base state 624 also includes at least two stages, and is switched from a performance stage E that displays a background image E to a performance stage F that displays a background image F. The high probability low base state 626 also includes at least two stages, and is switched from a performance stage G that displays a background image G to a performance stage H that displays a background image H.

In the low probability low base state 620, the first game is the main game, so when the first special symbol 51 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image A is switched to the background image B when the symbol variation starts or stops. . In the high probability high base state 624, the second game is the main one, so when the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image E is switched to the background image F by starting or stopping the symbol variation. . In the high probability low base state 626, since the second game is the main character, when the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image G is switched to the background image H when the symbol variation starts or stops. It will be done.

The low probability high base state 622 is also mainly played by the second game, but exceptionally, either the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times (the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 When the total number of variations of the special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number, the background image C is switched to the background image D with the start or stop of the symbol variation as an opportunity. That is, in the final symbol variation in the duration of the low probability high base state 622, the background display can be updated using at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation of the second special symbol 52, and the background display can be updated by the first special symbol 52. The background display can also be updated when at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation in 51 is triggered. The final symbol variation in the duration of the low probability high base state 622 refers to, for example, the 50th symbol variation in the high base state where the number of symbol variations reaches 50 times. In the fluctuations before the final fluctuation of the low probability high base state 622 (up to the 49th fluctuation), the background image C (for example, a background corresponding to the low probability high base state 622, and a background in which an ally character is inspired to stand up) is displayed, and in the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability high base state 622, the background image D (for example, the low probability high base state 622 is coming to an end, and the acquired prize ball in the low probability high base state 622) is displayed. A background for displaying numerical results) is displayed. In this case, the number of symbol variations is the sum of the number of variations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of variations of the second special symbol 52, so the symbol variation that reaches the 50th time, which is the final period, is the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51. There are cases in which there is a variation in the second special symbol 52 and cases in which there is a variation in the second special symbol 52. Therefore, even if either of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 reaches its final stage, update processing such as changing the background image will be performed when the symbol variation starts or stops. possible.

As mentioned above, the stage drawing in each performance stage is, in principle, executed when the main symbol in the current gaming state starts or stops changing among the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. . However, if a reset occurs on at least one of the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 due to a predetermined error, information on which production stage the reset occurred in is not backed up, so when returning from a power outage, It is not possible to immediately return to the production stage (that is, the background image cannot be drawn immediately). However, in order to return to the production stage as soon as possible, not only the main symbol in the current gaming state, but also the start of fluctuation of either the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52, regardless of the gaming state. The stage drawing is configured to be executed even when the device is stopped.

As a result of the above, while in principle the background display is updated appropriately according to the special symbol of the main game, in special circumstances it is also possible to update the background display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol of the non-main game. By doing so, it is possible to display an appropriate background even in exceptional situations.

As a modified example, after the duration of the low probability high base state 622 ends, the next symbol variation is started after the last symbol variation in the duration period ends (the variation stop command is sent). By this, or the predetermined time (this is the display condition of the standby demo screen) until the next symbol change starts, and the hold of the first special symbol 51 is 0 in the low probability low base state 620. To immediately switch from background D (special background for displaying gaming results in low probability high base state 622) to background A (normal background in low probability low base state 620) after the time measured in the situation has elapsed. A normal background immediate switching designation command may be sent. Here, it is assumed that the first hold of the first special symbol 51 is 0 immediately after the end of the low probability high base state 622, and if the ball enters the first starting port 11 in that situation, The background display is instantly switched by transmitting a normal background immediate switching designation command for switching to the normal background when the ball enters the ball. In addition, even if the ball does not enter the first starting port 11 after the end of the duration period of the low probability high base state 622, it is possible to enter the first start port 11 for a predetermined time (this is the time that is the display condition of the standby demo screen, and in the low probability low base state 622) By sending this normal background immediate switching designation command together with the command to switch to the standby demo screen after the elapse of the time measured when the hold of the special symbol 51 is 0, the background display can be instantly switched (this In this case, the standby demo screen is displayed with priority, so the display content that the player can actually see is the standby demo screen, and when the standby demo screen finishes displaying, the normal background is displayed) .

<12th Example> Special variation effect The basic configuration of the 12th Example is the same as the 1st to 11th Examples, so we will omit the description of the common points and focus on the differences from the 1st to 11th Examples. Explain.

In this embodiment, a count-up display is used to display the number of winning balls on the screen, and each time the increase in the number of winning balls in the high probability low base state and/or high base state reaches a predetermined number, the winning ball is awarded. Executes a display that enlarges and emphasizes the number of pitches. In this embodiment, an enlarged and highlighted display is executed every time the increment in the number of acquired prize balls reaches "2500". At this time, the enlarged and highlighted display of the number of prize balls is executed according to the cumulative number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the ball entering the grand prize opening, so immediately after the ball enters the grand prize opening (game Immediately after the ball is detected, the number of prize balls is added and displayed. However, since the count-up display of the number of prize balls is displayed while dynamically increasing the number in units of one ball or several balls, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the ball entering the grand prize opening is Even if the cumulative number of pitches (real number) has already reached a multiple of "2500", it will only be a displayed number smaller than the actual number until the count-up display of the number of prize pitches catches up with the display of the multiple of "2500". . Therefore, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, this numerical difference is processed as follows.

The performance determining means 303 (sub CPU 310) manages the total number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out. The production control means 304 (control CPU 320) counts up and displays the total number of prize balls on the screen of the production display device 60, and also indicates that the total number of prize balls managed by the production determination means 303 (sub CPU 310) reaches a specific number. If the number of prize balls has been reached, even before the number of prize balls on the count-up display reaches a specific number, the number of prize balls is highlighted when the total has been reached.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a screen displaying the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit rush. (a) mainly shows the state during count-up display before enlarged highlighting, (b) shows enlarged highlighted display, and (c) mainly shows the state of count-up display after enlarged highlighting.

In FIG. 47(a), a character 616 is displayed at approximately the center of the screen together with a background image of the small win rush mode. Alternative symbols 601a, 601b and simple symbols 602a, 602b, 602c, 602d are displayed in a variable manner at the edge of the screen. A firing direction indicator 606 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. On the left end of the screen, the number of jackpots 614, the total number of prize balls acquired 607, the winning count lamp 618, and the number of small wins 615 are displayed. Here, the number of jackpots 614 is the number of occurrences of special games in the high probability low base state and/or high base state (after transitioning to the high probability low base state and/or high base state, and then transitioning to the low probability low base state) (the number of times you hit the jackpot until you hit the jackpot), but the number of special games (first hits) in the high-probability low-base state and/or the low-probability low-base state that triggered the transition to the high-probability low-base state ” may be added, and the total number of prize balls acquired in the count display 607 indicates the total number of prize balls acquired in special games or small winning games in the high probability low base state and/or high base state (high probability low base state and/or the total number of prize balls won from the transition to the high base state until the transition to the low probability low base state) (However, the prizes won in small winning games in the high base state) (The number of balls is not added), but even if the number of prize balls obtained in the special game (first hit) in the high probability low base state and/or the low probability low base state that triggered the transition to the high base state is added. Often, the winning count lamp 618 is a lamp-like image that lights up one by one when the ball enters the big winning hole opened during the execution of a special game and/or a small winning game, and the number of small winnings 615 is , the number of small winning games in the high probability low base state (the number of small wins in the high probability low base state that were won between the transition to the high probability low base state and the transition to the low probability low base state) ). As mentioned above, the total number of prize balls acquired count display 607 displays the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small winning game, and in the example shown in the figure, it changes from "02180" to "02181". Indicates the moment when the count is counted up.

In FIG. 47(b), when the number of award pitches managed by the performance determining means 303 reaches "2500", an enlarged award pitch number display 619 with "2500 GET" written in large letters is displayed in the center of the screen. . At this time, "02350", which is the display content of the total number of award balls count display 607, is in the middle of counting up and is only a numerical value on the display, and has not caught up with the actual number of the total number of award balls acquired. It is shown that In addition, when the enlarged award pitch count display 619 is displayed, the count up is interrupted in the total award pitch count display 607, and the value on the total award pitch count display 607 is changed to the real value shown on the enlarged award pitch count display 619. By updating, the uncompleted count up becomes completed. The example in this figure shows a state in which a part of the total award pitch count display 607 overlaps with the enlarged award pitch count display 619, making it difficult to see. The numerical value on the count display 607 is updated with a real value. As a modified example, the enlarged award ball count display 619 is displayed in such a way as to completely cover the total award ball count display 607, and during that time, the total award ball count display 607 is hidden. It's okay. In addition, as another modification example, even if the enlarged award pitch count display 619 is displayed, the total award pitch count display 607 is not updated to the real value shown in the enlarged award pitch count display 619, and the total award pitch count display 619 is displayed. It may be configured so that the counting up of the prize ball count display 607 is not interrupted (continued).

In FIG. 47(c), after the enlarged prize ball number display 619 is erased, the total acquired prize ball number count display 607 is displayed after being updated with a real value, and the count-up display is restarted from that value. .

As a modified example, even when a specific effect display other than the enlarged award ball count display 619 occurs, for example, an effect that displays an image large enough to cover most of the screen, the total award ball count display 607 may also be displayed. After hiding the display of the number of prize balls that was counting up, if the display of the number of prize balls is restarted by the end of a specific production display, the uncompleted count-up will be counted up. The display may be resumed with . Specifically, a background change notice that covers most or all of the screen is provided, and when this background change notice occurs, the display of the number of award balls that was being counted up in the total number of award balls count display 607 is stopped. It is hidden (at this time, the uncompleted count-up is not counted up at the timing just before it is hidden), and the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and then hidden, and then the total number of prize balls won is displayed. The count display 607 is restarted, and at the timing of restarting the display, the display is restarted with the uncompleted count up completed. Even if the time required to count up the uncompleted portion is 10 seconds or more (for example, 20 seconds), 20 seconds have not yet elapsed 10 seconds after the background change notice is displayed until it is hidden ( Although the time required to count up the uncompleted portion has not elapsed yet, the display of the total number of award balls count display 607 is restarted with the uncompleted portion of the count up already counted up. In addition, as a modified example, when this background change notice is generated, when the display of the number of award balls that is being counted up in the total number of award balls count display 607 is to be hidden, the number of award balls that have been counted up in the total number of award balls count display 607 is hidden. It may be configured such that the uncompleted count-up is counted up, and in that case as well, after the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and then hidden, the total number of awarded balls count display 607 will display the count-up. The display will be resumed with the uncompleted uploads counted up.

In this embodiment, the performance determining means 303 (sub CPU 310) is configured to manage the total number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, but it is configured to manage the total number of prize balls that are paid out (already paid out). In that case, the display of the total number of award balls count display 607, the expanded number of award balls display 619, or the count-up display will not be displayed based on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, but based on the number of paid balls. The display may be configured to be displayed based on the number of prize balls that have been issued (already paid out).

Regarding the present example and the modified examples, "display of the number of prize balls acquired in a high probability low base state and/or high base state", that is, "display of the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during a so-called consecutive game" (hereinafter referred to as We have explained how to display the total number of prize balls acquired in a certain special game when the playing state before or after the execution of a certain special game is a high probability low base state. Total display of the number of prize balls won in one or more small winning games in the high probability high base state (from after transition to the high probability high base state until hitting the jackpot in the high probability high base state)" (hereinafter referred to as " The same configuration may be applied to a set of total display). In addition, in such a configuration, regarding the display of the total number of award balls acquired, the total display during consecutive matches and the total display for one set may be displayed at the same time, and the total display during consecutive matches and the total display for one set may be displayed at the same time. It is preferable to display both the total count and the count-up display. As for the enlarged and highlighted display, both the total display in the series and the total display for one set may be enlarged and highlighted, but only one of them may be enlarged and highlighted. Furthermore, the timing of the enlarged and highlighted display may be when the count display of the total number of prize balls acquired reaches a specific number, that is, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out managed by the production determining means 303 (sub CPU 310). The display is not based on the total or the total number of paid out (already paid out) prize balls reaching a specific number, but when the total number of won prize balls count display has reached a specific number. may be displayed based on that.

In addition, regarding the modified example that displays both the total display during consecutive matches and the total display for one set, the total display during consecutive matches is immediately switched and displayed without counting up (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls) , instead of counting up one by one like 2000→2001→2002→..., it suddenly switches instantly like 2000→2015) On the other hand, the total display for one set is configured to display the count up. Alternatively, the total display for one set can be changed immediately without displaying the count up (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls, the count is increased by 1 like 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → etc.) 2000 → 2015 instead of 2000 → 2015) On the other hand, the total display during a series of consecutive matches may be configured to be displayed in a count-up manner. Regarding the enlarged and highlighted display in this case, it is also possible to enlarge and highlight both the total display in a series of matches and the total display for one set, but it is also possible to enlarge and highlight only one of them. The timing may also be when the total number of award balls count display reaches a specific number, that is, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out managed by the performance determining means 303 (sub CPU 310), or The display is not based on the total number of paid out (already paid out) prize balls reaching a specific number, but based on the fact that the total number of awarded prize balls count display has reached the display related to the specific number. May be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment and each modification, the total display during a series of games or the total display for one set has been described, but the same configuration may be applied to the display during a special game. In other words, during a special game (for example, during a special game corresponding to a 10R probability-variable jackpot), when displaying the total during a consecutive match and/or displaying the total for one set, the same method as in this embodiment and each modification example is used. Depending on the configuration, a count-up display, an enlarged and highlighted display, or a count display of the total number of awarded balls may be displayed. In this case, a count-up display, an enlarged and highlighted display, and a count display of the total number of prize balls won are displayed based on the balls that enter the big winning hole during the execution of the special game (during each round). However, in special games where the number of prize balls won is small, for example, in special games that correspond to the 2R regular jackpot, even if the ball enters the big winning hole, there will be a count-up effect, enlarged highlighting, and the number of jackpots of 614 and the total number of prize balls won. It is preferable to configure so that the number count display 607, winning count lamp 618, and number of small wins 615 are not displayed. Adopting the same type of performance as special games with relatively high profits in special games with relatively low profits may cause players to misunderstand that it is an advantageous jackpot, and this should be prevented. This is because it is necessary to do so.

In addition, during a special game, the number of prize balls acquired during the special game will be added to the total number of prize balls (displayed in total with the number of prize balls of the small winning game) as shown in the total number of prize balls acquired count display 607. Each time, the total number of award pitches counted is added in real time and the total number of award pitches counted 607 is updated and displayed. Here, the update display that adds up the number of won prize balls is performed even if the next new ball enters (wins) during the addition effect that adds the prize ball for one ball that enters (wins). The addition performance is not interrupted, and after the addition performance is completed, the addition performance for the next ball entering is executed. For example, during the display switching from displaying "2400" to displaying "2415" (for example, gradually counting up like "2400" → "2401" → "2402" → ... → "2415") Even if a ball entering the grand prize opening 20 is detected during the display of "2402" in the production, the count-up corresponding to the entered ball will be started once the count-up to "2415" is completed. do. As a modification, the previous count-up performance may be forcibly terminated (the count-up is immediately increased from the display of "2402" to "2415"), and the count-up corresponding to the entered ball may be started. Furthermore, the total number of award balls may be displayed (separately) from the total number of award balls count display 607 in FIG. Cumulative value (total number of prize balls acquired for multiple special games and during multiple small hit rushes that stay before or after those multiple special games are executed (multiple high probability low base states) The total number of prize balls obtained during the special game and the one small hit rush that stays before or after the special game is executed. It is preferable to add up the number of prize balls obtained in multiple high-probability, low-base conditions.

Regarding the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 in this embodiment, the specifications described below (relationship between the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601) may be adopted.
(1) The display area of the main decorative pattern 600 that is easy for the player to recognize is larger than the display area of the alternative pattern 601 for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern).
(2) By setting the display position of the main decorative pattern 600 to a different display position depending on whether the mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, the variety of presentations with the decorative pattern can be increased depending on the presentation mode. realizable. On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, unnecessary development and design is required as the display position is the same regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. It is preferable to avoid doing this.
(3) By making the display mode of the main decorative pattern 600 different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, the variety of presentations with the decorative pattern can be increased depending on the presentation mode. realizable. For example, in the first presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 600 is made up of only decorative patterns of numbers (decorative patterns such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 600 is composed of decorative patterns of numbers. The main decorative pattern 600 is constructed by combining the and the decorative patterns of the ally characters (such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g", etc.) decorative patterns). On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, it is necessary to use only the same display mode, for example, numbers, regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. It is preferable to configure the alternative pattern 601 with only decorative patterns, thereby eliminating the need for unnecessary development and design.
(4) The display area of the main decorative pattern 600 can be changed (moved) depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not it is in normal reach, whether it is in super reach, etc.), so that the main decorative pattern It is possible to add diversity to 600 productions. On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the display area of the alternative pattern 601 can be kept unchanged (not moved) to avoid unnecessary development and design. suitable.
(5) The fluctuation speed of the main decorative pattern 600 is variable depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of the fluctuation, in the middle of the fluctuation, or just before the end of the fluctuation, etc.), such as low speed, medium speed, high speed, or super high speed. By doing so, it is possible to give variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 600. On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the variation speed of the alternative pattern 601 is not varied, or the number of steps in which it is varied is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design. Also, regarding the direction of variation, the main decorative pattern 600 allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (varies in multiple directions), while the alternative pattern 601 Preferably, the variation is only from top to bottom.
(6) The main decorative pattern 600 is temporarily stopped (stopped at the timing when the first special pattern 51 or second special pattern 52 stops) before it is permanently stopped (stopped at the timing when the first special pattern 51 or second special pattern 52 stops). (temporary stop accompanied by minute fluctuations during movement), and at that time, a special symbol that is a decorative symbol other than numbers (for example, the word "Super" is written to foretell the development to Super Reach). By temporarily stopping the main decorative pattern 600, the effect of the main decorative pattern 600 and other effects can be related. On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the alternative pattern 601 does not temporarily stop nor does it temporarily stop the special pattern, thereby eliminating unnecessary development design. It is preferable not to do this.
(7) The main decorative pattern 600 overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (for example, the appearance of an ally character or the appearance of an enemy character in FIG. 47, etc.), that is, is displayed in a superimposed manner. This kind of superimposed display is allowed in order to use as much space on the screen as possible to create a powerful effect. However, the alternative pattern 601 plays a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern. It is desirable that the display area is designed so that it does not overlap (display in an overlapping manner) with the display area of the other preview effects. However, regarding the relationship with special preview effects that inevitably overlap (for example, background previews displayed on the entire screen), the display priority of the alternative symbol 601 may be set higher than the display priority of the special preview effect. It is preferable to set it high (set so that the alternative symbol 601 is displayed in front of the special preview effect). Furthermore, since it is desirable that the firing direction indicator 606 shown in FIG. 32 etc. be always visible to the player, the display area of the alternative symbol 601 and the display area of the firing direction indicator 606 do not overlap ( It is desirable to design the display so that the display does not overlap. However, if the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 is moved or expanded, the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 and the display area of the firing direction indicator 606 may be overlapped (displayed in a superimposed manner). In that case, the display priority of the main decorative pattern 600 should be set lower than the display priority of the firing direction indicator 606 (set so that the main decorative pattern 600 is displayed on the rear side of the firing direction indicator 606). is suitable.
(8) In addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), the main decorative pattern 600 also performs predetermined actions at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start action, a temporary stop action, a reach action, and a shaking action). For example, if it becomes a non-reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 at the start of fluctuation. After performing an action in which all of Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it bounces. After performing such an operation, "2" temporarily stops and makes a slight swinging motion, and then, at the final stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed. In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform any of the operations. In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), when the fluctuation starts, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 After performing an action in which everything expands, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing action, and after “2” temporarily stops, it continues the swinging action. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then the left symbol stops to notify that it is reach. The right symbol performs a rotating motion and then continues the oscillating motion again, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and then "1" temporarily stops and continues the oscillating motion a little. Then, at the fixed stop timing, all operations of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform any of the operations. In addition, when it becomes a super reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 at the start of fluctuation It starts to fluctuate after performing an action in which all of Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then moves to the left to notify that it is a reach. The symbol and the right symbol perform a rotating motion, then continue the shaking motion again, and then, while the left symbol and the right symbol are performing the shaking motion, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol expands). (The symbols on the left and right, which were not overlapping or had a low overlapping ratio, are now overlapping or have a high overlapping ratio), then the super In order to execute the reach effect, the normal background changes to the reach background, and when the super reach effect is notified that the result is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left pattern, middle The symbol and the right symbol continue the swinging motion for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not perform bouncing motion or rotating motion). In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform any of the operations. With this configuration, it is possible to provide diversity in the presentation of the main decorative pattern 600, while the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure the system so that it does not operate in particular, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. Furthermore, even during the period from when the fluctuation stops until the standby demo screen is displayed, the main decorative pattern 600 performs the shaking motion after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation stops. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the alternative symbol 601 does not perform any movement. With this configuration, it is possible to stimulate the desire to play even when the game is on standby (the symbols are stopped), and the alternative symbol 601 does not perform a swinging motion, thereby notifying the user that the game is on standby. can be guaranteed. In addition, when the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the main decorative pattern 600 is hidden, but it is preferable that the alternative pattern 601 continues to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to emphasize the display of the standby demo screen while ensuring that what kind of symbol is stopped is displayed. Further, a specific pattern (for example, the middle pattern "7") among the main decorative patterns 600 may be configured such that a predetermined action is not performed or the probability of performing it is low compared to other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop motion (bouncing motion). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of the motion in a specific symbol.

In addition, regarding the count-up performance in this embodiment, it is preferable that it is performed even during the execution of the special game (based on the detection of the ball entering the big winning hole in the special game), and the specifications described below are adopted. Good too.
(1) The count-up effect corresponding to the arrival of game balls within the specified count number (especially the count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is currently being performed, and there are still 15 balls. If an over-win occurs when the count-up for the 15-ball count has not yet been completed, the count-up for the 15-ball count has not yet been completed. It is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started after the above-mentioned winnings have been carried out). Here, if the over winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or jackpot end demo starts), The count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), but the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has passed) Even if a ball enters the big winning hole 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning that is performed during the execution of the round), the timing of the ball entering the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning will not be executed. If the count-up for 15 pitches has not yet been completed and the count-up for 15 pitches has not yet been completed, wait until the count-up for the count-up effect that has not yet completed the count-up for 15 pitches has been completed. It is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the ball into the big winning hole 20 in the next round is started after the counting is done.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, in "0.03 second" increments. is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the time value required to count up one prize ball, plus the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the big prize opening 20 (unit prize ball number). It is derived by multiplying the values, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even if the special game is being executed, the count-up effect is not executed during the execution of the start demonstration and the execution of the end demonstration. Further, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demonstration, and is the period during which the closing of the big prize opening 20 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. This is the waiting time or end demo waiting time, and is set to "2 seconds" in common to all round games. In addition, by configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), it is possible for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even if the count-up performance is performed based on the above, the count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will be carried out beyond the interval period until the next unit game or end demo (if you win too much, there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded) , the break between each unit game or the break between the final unit game and the end demo can be made clear.
(3) The count-up performance time is set shorter than the execution time of the end demonstration. As mentioned above, the count-up performance time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (jackpot performance). The execution time of the end demonstration is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the last unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. In other words, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 20 is effectively detected (in other words, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined that the ball entered illegally). Although it is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game where there is a possibility that the game will not be detected, the execution time of the end demo is valid for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 20 within that time. This is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the end of the special game separated from the unit game, which has no possibility of being detected. By configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the end demo execution time (20 seconds), the game ball enters the big prize slot 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if a count-up effect is performed based on the ball being hit, or even if an over-win occurs in the final unit game, the big winning opening 20 will be closed after the final unit game. If the count-up effect is performed even after the end of the demo period (even during the end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demo period to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the break between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation is clearly defined. can do.
(4) When a prescribed count number of game balls enters the big prize opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of count-up performance time for the prescribed count number in this one unit game (one unit The count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpot types (jackpot medium performance). In this embodiment, by configuring the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time for the specified count number to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, the unit of the final round is Even if multiple count-up effects are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the big winning hole 20 in succession just before the end of the game, after the final unit game If the specification is such that the count-up effect is performed even after a certain jackpot opening 20 is closed (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), the count-up effect will be completed within the jackpot end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the break between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation is clearly defined. It can be done.

<13th example>
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, it is assumed that a so-called small win rush, which is a game state in which the number of small win games per unit time increases, that is, the frequency of occurrence of small wins increases, can be executed. This embodiment proposes suitable control and performance in a pachinko game machine that can execute special effects between the jackpot and special games and the small win rush. Since the basic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment is common to at least one of the first to twelfth embodiments, a description of the common features will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the first to twelfth embodiments.

(1-1) Specific state period The specific game control means 270 in FIG. 32 controls the special game as a specific state period in which the gaming state is at least a specific gaming state and can transition to an advantageous state after the elapse of that period. The number of symbol variations is determined within a range with the upper limit being a predetermined maximum number of continuations according to the type of stopping symbol that is the trigger. The "specific game state" here is, for example, a high base state (easy ball entry state or time saving state). The "advantageous state" is, for example, a small win rush. The "predetermined maximum number of times" is the maximum number of times the high base state can be continued, and is, for example, 20 times. Therefore, the number of symbol variations is determined within the range of 0 to 20 times as the specific state period. The determination of the number of symbol changes as the specific state period will be described later. In addition, in a modified example, the number of symbol variations as the specific state period may be fixed to a predetermined number, such as 20 times. In that case, at which number of symbol fluctuations out of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations the transition to an advantageous state will be made, or at which number of symbol fluctuations a change or suggestion in the performance will be executed. You may. Further, it is not necessary that all the symbol fluctuation frequencies from 0 to 20 are assigned to the stopped symbols, and for example, from 1 to 5 may not be selected.

The performance determining means 303 in FIG. 9 determines the content of a predetermined special performance as a performance to be executed over the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. That is, the special effect is executed during the period of easy entry state after the end of the special game. This special effect is called a "special time-saving effect" in this embodiment. The special time-saving effect is executed in the easy-to-enter state, regardless of whether it is a variable probability state or a normal probability state. That is, it is executed in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state. In the special time saving performance, whether the state is a probability variation state or a normal probability state is not clearly indicated in the performance, and the performance is executed as a so-called latent probability state. In the case of a high-accuracy, high-base state, the state changes to a high-accuracy, low-base state after the easy-to-enter state ends, leading to a small hit rush, but in the case of a low-accuracy, high-base state, the low-accuracy, low-base state occurs after the easy-to-enter state ends. Since it is in the base state, there is no transition to small hit rush.

The special time-saving performance is a performance that includes a battle performance that stimulates the player through the battle pattern with the opponent character to determine whether or not to move to a small hit rush after the end of the easy-to-enter state. The high base state is a period in which the number of balls batted and the number of balls produced are evenly balanced, and it is basically impossible to expect an increase in the number of balls in hand.Also, it is a period in which it is not visually obvious whether or not the ball is in a high base state due to the change in latency, but it is a period in which the number of balls batted and the number of balls produced are even. By executing the performance, it is possible to add taste to the performance. Furthermore, during the special time-saving production, a battle production is used to incite whether or not there will be a shift to a small win rush, but after the transition to a small win rush, the production emphasizes the granting of profits to the player, rather than a production that excites like a battle production. is executed.

FIG. 48 shows the performance flow from the special game to the small hit rush. As explained below, after the end of the special game, there are cases where the game shifts to a small hit rush with a special time saving effect in between, and cases where it moves to a small hit rush without a special time saving effect, In some cases, the game may move to a low base state or the next special game without moving. After the special game (S1100) ends, if the high probability low base state is reached without passing through the high base state (time saving) (S1102), the special time saving effect is not executed and the game shifts to a small winning rush (S1104). When the high base state (time saving) is reached after the end of the special game (S1100), the process moves to a special time saving performance (S1110). The high base state in which the special time saving effect is executed can be a low certainty state or a high certainty state, and when the high base state continues in the low certainty state and reaches the end of the high base state (S1112), For example, in a battle performance, a challenge failure performance is executed, such as a performance in which the character is defeated by an opponent character (S1114), and the special time saving performance ends and a low base state is entered (S1116). When the high base state continues in the high accuracy state and reaches the end of the high base state (S1120), a challenge success performance is executed, for example, a performance of winning the opponent character in a battle performance (S1122), and a special time saving performance is performed. When the process ends, the process moves to the small hit rush (S1124).

When a jackpot occurs after a reach effect in the special time saving effect (S1110) (S1130), similar to the case where the transition to a small hit rush occurs in S1124, for example, a challenge success effect such as a battle effect where the opponent character is defeated. is executed (S1132), the special time-saving effect is completed, and the game shifts to a special game (S1134). The special time saving effect (S1110) becomes a battle effect, but if the opponent character loses through the reach effect without winning or losing (S1136), the special time saving effect continues (S1110).

(1-2) Special time-saving performance The performance determining means 303 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the maximum number of continuations from the first symbol fluctuation performance as the content of the special time-saving performance, regardless of the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period. It can be determined to initially display a certain number of performance suggestion objects, and to erase the performance suggestion object corresponding to the symbol variation each time a symbol variation is executed. The "number corresponding to the maximum number of continuations" is 20. The plurality of "performance suggestion objects" are display objects that can each respond to symbol fluctuations and can suggest in appearance the possibility of shifting to an advantageous state in the corresponding symbol fluctuation performance. In this embodiment, a "pseudo reserved ball" is exemplified as a performance suggestion object. The pseudo reserved balls are display objects that have the appearance of so-called reserved balls or reserved displays, and each one is made to appear to correspond to the current symbol variation and the symbol variation after the next variation. However, the number of pseudo-held balls initially displayed is 20, which is more than the upper limit of 4, and it also corresponds to future holds that have not yet been held, so it is only a pseudo-holding ball for the sake of presentation. It's just a holdover ball. In addition to literally erasing the effect-suggesting object every time the corresponding symbol variation is executed, "erasing" is a visual equivalent to erasing that clearly indicates that the symbol variation has been executed. Other display methods may be used as long as they produce the desired effect. For example, the color or pattern may be changed to black, darkened, or semi-transparent, or an x mark indicating that the symbol variation has been executed may be placed on top of the other.

In this way, the special time-saving effect allows a so-called look-ahead effect to be executed using a pseudo-holding number (20 pieces) that is larger than the actual number of balls held (upper limit of 4), making the game more profound than the normal hold-reading effect. It is possible to create sexuality.

FIG. 49 shows a screen example of the special time saving effect. FIG. 49(a) is an example of a screen at the start of the special time saving effect. In the special time-saving performance, images such as battle performance images and decorative patterns are displayed in the battle performance display area 810 at about the top 2/3 of the screen of the performance display device 60, and in the pseudo reserved ball display area at about the bottom 1/3 of the screen. At 800, a plurality of performance suggestion objects called pseudo reserved balls are displayed.

In the battle performance display area 810, a symbol variation of an alternative symbol 818 is displayed as a decorative symbol in the left corner of the region, and a character string "Right hit" for guiding right hit is displayed as a guide display 819 in the upper right corner of the area. At the lower center of the battle performance display area 810, a plurality of reserved balls 814 and the variable reserved balls 816 are displayed. The pending balls 814 and the variable pending balls 816 are different from the pseudo pending balls displayed in the pseudo pending ball display area 800, and are pending balls that correspond only to lottery values that are actually being held or are changing. In the center of the battle performance display area 810, an opponent character 812 to compete with in the battle performance is displayed. There are multiple types of opponent characters that can be displayed as the opponent character 812, and the multiple types of opponent characters each have different strengths in battle. It is suggested that the stronger the opponent character is, the more likely it is that one will win against the other character, that is, the expectation of transitioning to a small hit rush will be relatively low; This suggests that expectations for a shift to a small-hit rush are relatively high.

In the pseudo reserved ball display area 800, 20 pseudo reserved balls are initially displayed. In the figure, numbers from "1" to "20" are added to the 20 pseudo-reserved balls for convenience, and the numbers are digested in the order corresponding to the symbol changes from the 1st to the 20th time. is the premise of the performance. In addition, each pseudo-held ball is marked with letters such as ``Tsu'' indicating ``Normal'', ``Ba'' indicating ``Battle Effect'', and ``RA'' indicating ``Last'' as its type. . The pseudo-retention balls that indicate the 10th, 18th, and 19th times are battle pseudo-retention balls 804 with vertical stripes, and are labeled as "10-ba," "18-ba," and "19-ba" in the figure. , 10, 18, and 19th symbol variations suggest that a battle effect can be executed. The pseudo-holding ball that indicates the 20th time is the final pseudo-holding ball 806 with a mesh pattern. This suggests a successful transition to a hit rush. The other 17 balls are plain normal pseudo reserved balls, and as shown in the figure, they are marked with "1.", suggesting that they are normal symbol variation effects. Among the above 20 pseudo-holding balls, the pseudo-holding ball that shows the current pattern change changes to the attention pseudo-holding ball 802, which has a larger diameter than the other pseudo-holding balls (however, the pattern does not change, (only the size increases), the appearance shows that it is a pseudo-holding ball of the fluctuation.

The battle pseudo-retention ball 804 is a pseudo-retention ball that triggers the execution of a battle performance, and if the result of the battle performance is a victory, it is a good opportunity to move to a small hit rush, but on the other hand, in the case of a loss, there is a special time reduction. The performance and high base state end. On the other hand, if the final pseudo reserved ball 806 is reached, the transition to the small hit rush is confirmed. Therefore, as a player, I think it is better to reach the final pseudo-reserved ball 806 without going through the battle effect than to lose at the battle pseudo-reserved ball 804 and risk failing to transition to the small hit rush. You can also do that. Therefore, it can be said that the battle pseudo-holding ball 804 is a pseudo-holding ball with a risk of ending the high base state without transitioning to a small hit rush.

The normal pseudo-retention ball may be a pseudo-retention ball called a "hidden destruction ball." Although it looks the same as a normal pseudo-retention ball, it secretly functions as a "destruction ball." The hidden destroyed ball becomes a trigger for the process of destroying and erasing one or more of the other pseudo reserved balls placed thereafter. If it is a hidden destruction ball, there is a relatively high possibility that the battle pseudo-retention ball 804 placed afterward will be destroyed and erased, so it can be expected to reduce the risk of ending the high base state, and the remaining As the number of pseudo-reserved balls decreases, the remaining number of times until the final pseudo-reserved ball 806 also decreases, thereby increasing the expectation of transition to a small hit rush.

A pseudo pending ball notice area 807 is provided in the upper left corner of the battle effect display area 810, and a preview pseudo pending ball 808 is displayed in the pseudo pending ball notice area 807. The type of pseudo reserved ball displayed as the advance notice pseudo reserved ball 808 and whether or not to display it are determined according to the following rules. First, at the start of symbol variation, if there is a battle pseudo-holding ball 804 within 5 variations, the battle pseudo-holding ball 804 is displayed in the battle effect display area 810. In the example of FIG. 49(a), since there is no battle pseudo-holding ball 804 in the range of the first to fifth pseudo-holding balls, the preview pseudo-holding ball 808 is not displayed in the battle effect display area 810. In the example of FIG. 49(a), the 10th pseudo-held ball is the first battle pseudo-held ball 804, so when the ball progresses to the 6th pseudo-held ball within 5 fluctuations, the battle is displayed in the pseudo-held ball notification area 807. A preview pseudo-holding ball 808 having the same pattern as the pseudo-holding ball 804 is displayed. In addition, when the preview pseudo-holding ball 808 with the same pattern as the battle pseudo-holding ball 804 displayed in the battle effect display area 810 is destroyed by a hidden destruction ball, the battle pseudo-holding ball 804 in the corresponding battle effect display area 810 is also destroyed. Destroyed.

In a modified example, types of pseudo-retention balls other than the normal pseudo-retention balls, battle pseudo-retention balls, and last pseudo-retention balls may also be used. For example, a "chance ball" or the like that can change from a normal pseudo-reserved ball may be used, and the color of the "chance ball" may indicate the high degree of expectation of transition to a small hit rush.

FIG. 49(b) illustrates a state in which the game has progressed to the 10th pseudo reserved ball. A battle pseudo-holding ball 804, which is the tenth pseudo-holding ball, is enlarged and displayed as a noteworthy pseudo-holding ball 802. A preview pseudo-holding ball 808 with the same pattern as the battle pseudo-holding ball 804 displayed in the pseudo-holding ball notification area 807 at the stage of the sixth pseudo-holding ball is displayed in the pseudo-holding ball notification area when the alternative symbol 818 develops into a reach. It is deleted along with 807. As shown in FIG. 49(b), the pseudo reserved balls whose symbols have changed are displayed in black, indicating that they have been substantially erased. In addition, the 13th to 18th pseudo-reserved balls are destroyed by the hidden destruction balls, and are similarly darkened to indicate that they have been virtually erased.

(2-1) Arrangement pattern of pseudo-held balls The performance determining means 303 in FIG. Selections are made according to selection criteria that have different selection tendencies depending on the situation. The "selection criteria" here is a scenario selection table in which selection criteria for the special time-saving effects described below are defined. The arrangement pattern is defined in a plurality of types of special time-saving performance scenarios in which the production process of the special time-saving performance is determined. A special time-saving presentation scenario is selected based on a scenario selection table with different selection tendencies depending on the stopped symbols, and an arrangement pattern is determined by the selected special time-saving presentation scenario. The scenario selection table defines the correspondence between symbol numbers and one or more special time-saving production scenarios, and one of the one or more special time-saving production scenarios corresponding to the stopped symbol is selected by lottery. be done.

The effect determining means 303 stores a plurality of types of scenario selection tables corresponding to different opponent characters, and selects a special time-saving effect scenario by referring to any of them. The plurality of types of opponent characters have different strengths in battle performance, that is, different fighting abilities. For example, there are three types of opponent characters, characters A, B, and C, and the characters are set to become stronger in the order of character A, which is the weakest, character B, and character C. The selection tendency of which opponent character is likely to be selected differs depending on the stopped symbols. The weaker the opponent character is selected, the more the player expects to win in the battle performance and move on to the small win rush, and the stronger the opponent character is selected, the more the player wins in the battle performance and moves on to the small win rush. Expectations to migrate are lower. The stronger the selected opponent character is, the more battle pseudo-retention balls 804 are likely to be arranged relatively to the scenario selection table, and the weaker the selected opponent character is, the fewer battle pseudo-retention balls 804 are likely to be arranged. An easy-to-use scenario selection table is referenced.

FIG. 50 schematically shows a character selection table. In the character selection table 840, the symbol number is shown in the first column 842, the state of high accuracy, low accuracy, etc. is shown in the second column 844, and the three columns of the third column 846 each show the symbol number. The selectability of characters A, B, and C is shown. In the example of this figure, it is determined that the special time-saving effect is executed for symbols "12" to "68" among the symbols numbered "0" to "74". In addition, in the figure, the description of the parts corresponding to the symbol numbers "27" to "62" is omitted. For example, in the case of symbol number "13", "Character A", "Character B", and "Character C" are all marked with "○". One of them will be selected by lottery. In the case of symbol number "15", either "Character A" or "Character B" is selected by lottery as the opponent character, as indicated by "○" in "Character A" and "Character B". In the case of symbol number "17", "Character C" is always selected as the opponent character, as "O" is shown only for "Character C".

(2-2) Specific timing and special variation pattern table The second variation pattern determining means 232 in FIG. A normal variation pattern is selected based on the symbol variation at a specific timing predetermined for each stopped symbol, and a special variation pattern is selected based on a special variation pattern table different from the normal variation pattern table. "Specific timing" is the timing at which a specific performance is executed in the special time-saving performance. The "special variation pattern table" is, for example, a table in which it is determined that a variation pattern with a fixed variation time will be selected with a 100% probability to execute a specific performance, regardless of the number of balls on hold, etc. . In this embodiment, regarding which variation pattern table should be referred to for each symbol variation in the special time saving performance, only the symbol variation timing that refers to a specific special variation pattern table is defined in the specific timing table, and for other symbol variations, Other special fluctuation pattern tables or normal fluctuation pattern tables are referred to.

The number of symbols in this embodiment is extremely large, and if a variation pattern table for all symbol variations from one to a maximum of 20 in a specific state period is defined for all symbols, the amount of data in that table would be enormous. Therefore, the relatively small storage capacity of the main board 200 may become strained. Therefore, in this embodiment, only the specific timing at which a specific special variation pattern table should be referenced is defined for all symbols, and the timing at which other special variation pattern tables or normal variation pattern tables should be referenced is not defined one by one. As a result, the table can be made compact and the storage capacity of the main board 200 can be avoided.

FIG. 51 schematically shows a table reference table. The table reference table 820 is a table showing which variation pattern table should be referred to for each symbol. In the table reference table 820, the symbol number is shown in the first column 822, the state of high accuracy, low accuracy, etc. is shown in the second column 824, and the specific state is shown in the third column 826. The number of symbol changes as a period is shown. Column 25 included in the fourth column 828 shows the type of special variation pattern table that should be referred to for each symbol variation from the first to the 25th. In the example of this figure, one or more specific state periods are determined for symbols numbered ``12'' to ``68'' from symbol numbers ``0'' to ``74,'' and a special time-saving effect is determined to be executed. It is being In addition, in the figure, the description of the parts corresponding to the symbol numbers "27" to "62" is omitted.

For example, in the case of symbol number "15", the number of symbol variations of "9" is associated with the specific state period, and a special variation pattern table of the type that indicates "repeat" at the 5th of the 9 symbol variations. It is shown that the special variation pattern table of the type indicated as "Riku" is referred to for the eighth time, and the special variation pattern table of the type of "KR" is referred for the ninth time. For the remaining six times, the normal variation pattern table is referred to as indicated by "pass". "Re-succeed" is a battle effect in S1136 of FIG. 48, but shows a special variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to an effect in which the opponent character loses through the reach effect without winning or losing the opponent character. . “Retaliation” indicates a special variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the winning performance in the battle performance in S1122 of FIG. 48. A battle pseudo-holding ball 804 in FIG. 49 is displayed as a pseudo-holding ball corresponding to "Re-battle". "KR" indicates a special variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a symbol variation that ends the symbol variation immediately after the start of the symbol variation and shifts to a small hit rush in S1124 of FIG. 48. In the specific timing table, a value indicating the 5th time, which is the specific timing to refer to the special variation pattern table of "repeat", is defined in association with the symbol number "15", and "repeat" and "KR" The timing at which the special fluctuation pattern table and the normal fluctuation pattern table should be referred to is not specified. Note that the timing of referring to the special variation pattern table for "Riku" and "KR" is determined based on the symbol number or information representing the number of specific state periods linked to the symbol number.

As a result, the specific game control means 270 determines the number of symbol variations in the specific state period to be "9 times" in the case of symbol number "15". In the case of the symbol number "15", the effect determining means 303 refers to the "repeat" special variation pattern table for the fifth symbol variation based on the specific timing table, and based on the number of symbol variations in the specific state period. For the 8th symbol variation, the special variation pattern table of "Riku" is referred to, for the 9th symbol variation, "KR" is referred to, and for other symbol variations, the normal variation pattern table is referred to.

For example, in the case of symbol number "68", the number of symbol variations of "20" is associated with the specific state period, and the special variation pattern of "repeat" occurs on the 10th, 14th, and 17th of the 20 symbol variations. It is shown that the table is referred to, and the 19th time the special fluctuation pattern table of the type indicated as "return" is referred to, and the 20th time the special fluctuation pattern table of the type indicated as "end" is referred to. Further, it is shown that the special fluctuation pattern table of the type indicated as "missing" is referred to from the 21st to the 25th time after the end of the specific state period. The 26th time is indicated as "left-handed," which means that the ball is hit to the left, that is, referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 11. The normal fluctuation pattern table will be referred to the remaining 15 times as well, as indicated by "pass". "Re-fall" indicates a special variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a defeat effect in the battle effect in S1114 of FIG. A battle pseudo-held ball 804 in FIG. 49 is displayed as a pseudo-held ball corresponding to "re-drop". "End" indicates a special variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a symbol variation effect that displays a screen for ending the special time saving effect and high base state in S1116 of FIG. "Escape" refers to a special variation pattern table that prevents variations other than normal variations from occurring until five symbol variations are completed after the high base state ends and transitions to the low base state. In the specific timing table, values indicating the 10th, 14th, and 17th times, which are specific timings to refer to the special variation pattern table for "repeat", are defined in association with symbol number "68", and "repeat" The timing at which the special variation pattern table for "end" and "dropout" and the normal variation pattern table should be referred to is not specified. The timing of referring to the special variation pattern table of "fall", "end", and "drop" is determined based on the symbol number or information representing the number of specific state periods linked to the symbol number.

As a result, the specific game control means 270 determines the number of symbol variations in the specific state period to be "20" in the case of symbol number "68". In the case of the symbol number "68", the production determining means 303 refers to the "repeat" special variation pattern table for the 10th, 14th, and 17th symbol variations based on the specific timing table, and determines the symbol variation in the specific state period. Based on the number of times, it is decided to refer to the special fluctuation pattern of "fall" on the 19th time, "end" on the 20th time, and "dropout" on the 21st to 25th times, and refer to the normal fluctuation pattern for other symbol fluctuations. do.

FIG. 52 schematically shows a specific timing table. In the specific timing table 821 in FIG. 52(a), the number of symbol variations that is the specific timing to refer to the special variation pattern table for "repeat" in the high base state is defined for each symbol, and There is no stipulation regarding the timing at which special fluctuation pattern tables other than "Tsuki" and normal fluctuation pattern tables should be referred to. The first column 823 shows the symbol number for each symbol, and the second column 825 shows the number of symbol changes at the specific timing for each symbol. For example, for symbol number "15", it is specified that the fifth symbol change is at a specific timing. For the symbol number "68", it is specified that the 10th, 14th, and 17th symbol changes are specific timings. In this way, in the specific timing table 821, only the specific timing to refer to the special variation pattern table of "repeat" is defined for all symbols, and the special variation pattern table other than "repeat" and the normal variation pattern table are referred to. By not specifying the timings to be used one by one, the table can be made compact and the storage capacity of the main board 200 can be avoided.

Note that when a table specifies not only the specific timing to refer to a specific special variation pattern table but also the timing to refer to the normal variation pattern table according to the conventional method, a table such as the variation pattern reference table 841 shown in FIG. 52(b) is used. This results in a table structure. In the conventional table structure, a set of a table number to be referred to and a number of symbol variations to be referred to is defined, and a set of a table number and a number of symbol variations to be referenced is defined in accordance with the order of reference corresponding to the switching of tables to be referred to. The first column 843 shows the symbol number, and the second column 845 shows the table number to be referred to and the set of symbol fluctuation times to be referred to. For example, the set indicated by ``5'' indicates the table number of the normal variation pattern table and the number of symbol variations that continuously refer to that table. The set indicated by "1" in "Repeat" indicates the table number of the "Repeat" special variation pattern table and that the table is referred to only once. In the case of the conventional fluctuating pattern reference table 841, even symbols that do not have a specific timing, such as symbol numbers "12", "13", "14", and "22", are displayed in the normal fluctuating pattern table, such as "tsu" and "4". It is necessary to specify the number and the number of symbol variations, and the amount of data is larger than the specific timing table 821, which does not require specifying data such as reference timing for the same symbol number. In addition, in the case of the conventional variation pattern reference table 841, there are three specific timings to refer to the special variation production pattern of "repeat", such as symbol number "68", and the table including the reference timing of the normal variation pattern table. It is necessary to define six sets of numbers and the number of symbol variations, and the amount of data is larger than the specific timing table 821, which only needs to define three specific timings for the same symbol number. As shown in FIG. 52(b), in the variation pattern reference table 841, the amount of data specified for each symbol is up to 7 sets and 14 pieces, such as symbol number "68", whereas in the specific timing table 821, the data amount specified for each symbol is It is sufficient to specify a maximum of three numbers, such as the number "68". The data structure of the specific timing table 821 can reduce the amount of data even on a symbol-by-symbol basis, but when the number of symbols is large as in this embodiment, the data amount reduction effect becomes even greater by the number of symbols, and the data of the specific timing table 821 The amount is significantly reduced compared to the conventional variation pattern reference table 841.

(3) Scenario selection table The performance determining means 303 selects one of the scenario selection tables from among the plurality of types of scenario selection tables according to different reference standards depending on the stopped symbols during the specific state period. For example, the effect determining means 303 selects the scenario selection table corresponding to the opponent character selected in FIG. 50 according to the stopped symbols. The scenario selection tables include a scenario selection table A corresponding to character A, a scenario selection table B corresponding to character B, and a scenario selection table C corresponding to character C. The performance determining means 303 refers to the selected scenario selection table and selects by lottery one or more special time-saving performance scenarios corresponding to the stopped symbols. The performance determining means 303 can execute a performance that notifies the transition to a small hit rush based on the selected special time-saving performance scenario.

If the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period is less than the maximum number of continuations of "20", some of the multiple performance suggestion objects displayed in the special performance are deleted to substantially reduce the number of display objects. As a result, the end timing of the special performance is suggested in accordance with the end timing of the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. Alternatively, the timing of transition to the small hit rush is suggested in accordance with the timing of transition of the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period. If the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period is equal to the maximum number of continuations of "20 times", the timing of transition to small hit rush is suggested in accordance with the timing corresponding to the maximum number of continuations of "20 times". . In this way, whether the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period is less than 20 or equal to 20, the actual symbol variation during the specific state period is determined by the effect processing by the effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300. The performance period of the special time-saving performance can be adjusted so that the performance ends within the specified number of times.

FIG. 53 schematically shows a scenario selection table. In this figure, scenario selection table B is illustrated. In the scenario selection table 830, the scenario number is shown in the first column 832, the corresponding symbol number is shown in the second column 834, and high accuracy, low accuracy, etc. are shown in the third column 836. The fourth column 838 shows the type of regulation content, and the 21st column included in the fifth column 839 shows the scenario for each pseudo-reserved ball from the 1st to the 20th ball. . In the example of this figure, scenario numbers "4" to "11" and "61" to "65" are illustrated, and descriptions of other parts are omitted.

For example, scenario numbers "8" to "11" all correspond to symbol number "21", and if the stop symbol is "21", one of scenarios "8" to "11" will be selected by lottery. Ru. When scenario "9" is selected, the initial placement pattern of the pseudo-retention balls is that "Ba" (battle pseudo-retention balls 804) are placed in the 8th, 11th, 13th, 15th, and 19th places, and "Ba" (battle pseudo-retention balls 804) is placed in the 20th place. A'' (final pseudo-reserved ball 806) is placed, and all remaining normal pseudo-reserved balls are placed. In addition, the third normal pseudo-holding ball is set as the first "hidden destruction ball" as it is written as "Break 1", and the eighth normal pseudo-holding ball is written as "<1>". As shown, it is set to be destroyed by the first "Hidden Destruction Ball". Similarly, the 10th normal pseudo-retained ball is set as the second "hidden destruction ball" as it is written as "break 2", and each of the 11th to 19th normal pseudo-reserved balls is "<2> ”, it is set to be destroyed by the second “Hidden Destruction Ball”.

According to the scenario with scenario number "9", the 1st and 2nd normal pseudo-holding balls will have a normal pattern variation effect, the 3rd normal pseudo-holding ball will activate a hidden destruction ball, and the 8th battle pseudo-holding ball will activate. 804 is destroyed and erased. The 4th and 5th normal pseudo reserved balls become normal symbol variation effects, and in the 6th "repeat", the reach effect is removed and the special time saving effect continues. After the normal symbol variation performance using the 7th normal pseudo-retention ball, the erased 8th pseudo-retention ball is skipped and the 9th normal pseudo-retention ball performs the normal symbol variation performance as the 8th symbol variation. be done. The 10th normal pseudo-reserved ball is executed as the 9th symbol variation, and the second hidden destruction ball is activated to destroy and erase all the 11th to 19th pseudo-reserved balls. The 20th "retribution" is executed as the 10th symbol variation, resulting in a victory in the battle performance, and the transition to a small hit rush occurs in the 11th symbol variation.

For example, the scenario number "63" corresponds to the symbol number "63", and when the stopped symbol is "63", the scenario "63" is selected. When scenario "63" is selected, the initial placement pattern of pseudo-retention balls is that "Ba" (battle pseudo-retention balls 804) are placed in the 9th, 12th, 15th, 16th, and 19th places, and "Ba" (battle pseudo-retention balls 804) is placed in the 20th place. A'' (final pseudo-reserved ball 806) is placed, and all remaining normal pseudo-reserved balls are placed. In addition, the second normal pseudo-holding ball is set as the first "hidden destruction ball" as it is written as "break 1", and the 9th, 12th, and 15th normal pseudo-holding balls are "<1>". ”, it is set to be destroyed by the first “Hidden Destruction Ball”. Similarly, the 8th normal pseudo-holding ball is set as the 2nd "hidden destruction ball" as it is written as "break 2", and each of the 16th normal pseudo-holding balls is set as "<2>". As written, it is set to be destroyed by the second "Hidden Destruction Ball".

According to the scenario with scenario number "63", the first normal pseudo-held ball becomes a normal symbol variation effect, the second normal pseudo-held ball activates a hidden destruction ball, and the 9th, 12th, and 15th battle pseudo-balls are activated. The reserved ball 804 is destroyed and erased. The 3rd and 4th normal pseudo reserved balls become normal symbol variation effects, and in the 5th "repeat", the reach effect is removed and the special time saving effect continues. After the normal pattern variation performance using the 6th and 7th normal pseudo-holding balls, a hidden destruction ball is activated with the 8th normal pseudo-holding ball, and the 16th battle pseudo-holding ball 804 is destroyed and erased. Next, the erased 9th pseudo-reserved ball is skipped and the 10th normal pseudo-reserved ball is used as the 9th symbol variation, and a normal symbol variation effect is executed. In the 11th "re-succession", the reach effect is missed as the 10th symbol change and the special time-saving effect continues, then the 12th pseudo-held ball that was erased is skipped and the 13th and 14th normal pseudo-held balls are played. A normal symbol variation effect is executed as the 11th and 12th symbol variation of the ball. Skip the erased 15th and 16th pseudo-held balls, and in the 17th "re-succession", the reach effect is missed as the 13th symbol change, the special time-saving effect continues, and then the 18th normal pseudo-held ball The ball will be the 14th regular symbol change performance. The 19th "re-drop" is executed as the 15th symbol variation, the battle performance is defeated, and the 16th symbol variation shifts to a low base state and the special time saving performance ends.

Scenarios for the performance as described above are defined in the scenario selection table B. Scenario selection table B corresponds to character B as an opponent character, but when character A, who is weaker than character B, is selected, scenario selection table A has "Ba" (battle pseudo hold ball 804) than scenario selection table B. The number of locations is small. That is, in the scenario selection table A, many arrangement patterns and scenarios that appear to be easy to reach "A" (final pseudo-held ball 806) are defined, at least in appearance, and a selection tendency is set in which such scenarios are likely to be selected. Ru. On the other hand, in the scenario selection table C when the character C, who is stronger than the character B, is selected, more "Ba" (battle pseudo reservation balls 804) are arranged than in the scenario selection table B. That is, in the scenario selection table C, many arrangement patterns and scenarios that appear to be difficult to reach "A" (final pseudo-reserved ball 806) are defined, at least in appearance, and a selection tendency is set in which such scenarios are likely to be selected. Ru.

Since the performance scenario for the special fluctuation performance is stipulated in this way, if the player can find the regularity of the stipulation, the possibility of transition to a small hit rush can be predicted in advance by the arrangement pattern and development of the pseudo reserved balls. It can also be detected. In addition, in the case of a high probability state, that is, when the transition to a small hit rush is planned, the shortest period of the specific state, which is the latent probability change period, is 5 times, and in the case of a low probability state, that is, when the transition to a small hit rush is not planned. The shortest specific state period, which is the latent probability variable period, is 10 times, which is longer than the high probability state. Even as a special variation performance, the scenario structure is such that the performance will be continued until the minimum number of times.

(4) Small hit rush transition effect During a specific state period, a special time-saving effect that suggests the development of the game until the symbol change is executed multiple times starts from the first symbol change effect to the symbol determined as the specific state period. It is executed until the number of variations in the number of symbols changes. In the special time-saving performance, a transition performance that suggests a transition to a small hit rush can be executed at the same time as the symbol fluctuation reaches the determined number of symbol fluctuations, and until the symbol fluctuation reaches the determined number of symbol fluctuations. If a predetermined condition is satisfied, after a performance that is at least partially common to the transition performance is executed, the transition can be made to another advantageous state different from the small hit rush. The "advantageous state different from the small winning rush" referred to here is a state advantageous to the player such as a special game, for example. In FIG. 48, the performance in which the player wins in the battle performance in S1122 and moves to a small hit rush, and the performance in which he wins in the battle performance in S1132 and moves to a special game are common performances. For example, in the case of the symbol number "21" in Figure 51, if the fourth variation in the specific state period is "Tsu" and hits the jackpot, the normal variation pattern table is referred to, but the special variation pattern table for "Riku" is referred to. When is referenced, a performance that has some parts in common with a victory performance in a battle performance (for example, the final performance part where the opponent character is defeated in a battle performance, the performance part where a movable accessory is dropped, etc.) will be executed. Make it. For example, in the case of scenario number "64" in FIG. 53, if it is read in advance that the pending lottery value of the 7th variation corresponds to a jackpot at the 3rd variation in the specific state period, the pseudo pending lottery value of the 7th variation In addition to suggesting a jackpot by changing the ball from "Tsu" to "Ba", it is also similar to the production that wins in the battle production when the special variation pattern table of "Riku" is referred to in the symbol variation production of the 7th variation. To ensure that performances common to all parts are executed.

(5-1) Symbol number and symbol classification number When the first symbol determining means 226 or the second symbol determining means 227 in FIG. A symbol belonging to any one of a plurality of symbol types including the second symbol type and the second symbol type is selected as the symbol stopping mode. Here, the "first symbol type" is the symbol type to which the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol that involves transition to the high base state where the special time saving effect is executed, and the "second symbol type" is the symbol type that This is the symbol type to which the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol that do not involve transition to the base state belong.

FIG. 54 schematically shows the correspondence between symbol numbers and symbol classification numbers. In the symbol determination table 850, the column of the first column 852 shows the symbol number, the column of the second column 854 indicates whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the column of the third column 856 The column indicates whether the symbol type is "miss", "probable variable jackpot", "normal jackpot", or "small hit". In the fourth column 858, presence or absence of time reduction and the number of time reductions (number of symbol changes as a specific state period) are shown. Further, although not specified in the symbol determination table 850, the symbol classification table 859 shows the symbol classification number corresponding to the symbol number of each symbol. The symbol classification table 859 shows symbol classification numbers corresponding to each symbol number.

The symbol number "0" is a missed symbol, and is referred to when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a miss. The symbol numbers "1" to "9" correspond to the first special symbols, and the symbol numbers "10" to "74" correspond to the second special symbols. Symbol numbers "69" to "74" correspond to small winning symbols. As shown in the symbol classification table 859, the symbol classification number "0" corresponds to the symbol number "1", the symbol classification number "1" corresponds to the symbol numbers "2" to "5", and the symbol classification number "1" corresponds to the symbol number "1". Symbol classification number “2” corresponds to “6” to “9”. The symbol numbers "10" to "68" correspond to the symbol division numbers "3" to "61" on a one-to-one basis, and the symbol division numbers "69" to "72" correspond to the symbol division number "62". However, the symbol classification number "63" corresponds to the symbol numbers "73" to "74". The symbols with symbol numbers "12" to "68" belong to the above-mentioned "first symbol type", that is, the symbol type of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol with transition to the high base state. The jackpot symbols with symbol numbers "0" to "11" belong to the above-mentioned "second symbol type."

(5-2) Start demo time and end demo time Each time a symbol belonging to the first symbol type is selected as a symbol indicating a jackpot, the special game control means 260 controls the start demo performance time and end demo time of the corresponding special game. At least one of the times for the end demonstration performance is calculated based on a predetermined initial value and a symbol number uniquely assigned to each symbol. As shown in FIG. 54, the number of symbols and the number of symbol classifications used in this example are very large, so if a table is prepared and stored that specifies individual start demo times or end demo times for all symbols, the table The amount of data becomes enormous and may strain the small storage capacity of the main board 200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the start demonstration time is dynamically generated each time, especially for symbols belonging to the first symbol type, so that it is not necessary to define it in the table. In this case, the table only needs to specify the start demo time and end demo time for a small number of symbols belonging to the second symbol type, so the table can be made compact and the storage capacity of the main board 200 can be avoided. I can do it.

Here, the "predetermined initial value" is, for example, 0.100 seconds, and the calculation method for the start demo time corresponding to the symbols belonging to the "first symbol type" is [Initial value 0.100 seconds] + ([ Symbol classification number] - [offset value]) x 0.004 seconds. That is, when a stopped symbol corresponds to the "first symbol type", first the symbol classification number to which the symbol belongs is determined from the symbol number uniquely assigned to each stopped symbol. How to determine the symbol classification number will be described later. A difference value is calculated by multiplying the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined offset value from the determined symbol classification number by 0.004 seconds, and the difference value is added to the initial value to be set as the start demonstration time. Thereby, the start demonstration time can be dynamically generated based on the initial value and the symbol number or symbol division number. The offset value is a value for excluding the second symbol type from the symbol classification number of the jackpot symbol. In the example of FIG. 54, the offset value is "5", which is equal to the number of symbol division numbers "0" to "4".

FIG. 55 schematically shows a demonstration time list. In the demonstration time list 860, the symbol classification number is shown in the first column 862, the second special symbol is shown in the second column 864, and the third special symbol is shown in the second column 864. The column 866 indicates whether the symbol type is "probable variable jackpot," "normal jackpot," or "small win." The fourth column 868 shows combinations of start demo time and end demo time.

For example, in the case of a jackpot symbol with symbol classification number "0", a combination of a start demonstration time "12.000 seconds" and an end demonstration time "16.336 seconds" is defined. In the case of a jackpot symbol with symbol classification number "1", a combination of a start demonstration time "87.500 seconds" and an end demonstration time "16.336 seconds" is defined. In the case of a jackpot symbol with symbol classification number "2", a combination of a start demonstration time of "87.500 seconds" and an end demonstration time of "10.000 seconds" is defined. In the case of a jackpot symbol with symbol classification number "3", a combination of a start demonstration time of "0.100 seconds" and an end demonstration time of "3.000 seconds" is defined. In the case of the jackpot symbol with symbol classification number "4", the starting demonstration time in the low-probability low base state is "0.100 seconds", the starting demonstration time in other states is "0.100 seconds", and the ending demonstration time is "45. 168 seconds" is defined. The above are the combinations of the start demo time and end demo time of each symbol belonging to the second symbol type, and at least one of the start demo time and end demo time is different from other symbols, and all the combinations are different. .

In the case of jackpot symbols with symbol classification numbers "5" to "61", the starting demo time in the low-probability low base state is dynamically generated using the above calculation formula, and the other (low-probability high base state and high-probability state ) have a common combination of start demo time "0.100 seconds" and end demo time "44.000 seconds". In other words, the symbols with symbol classification numbers "5" to "61" are each assigned a unique value for the start demo time in the low-probability, low-base state, and as a result, the combinations of start demo time and end demo time are all different. However, it is also different from the symbols belonging to the second symbol type.

For example, the starting demonstration time in the low-accuracy, low-base state for the symbol with symbol division number "5" is [initial value 0.100 seconds] + ([symbol division number "5"] - [offset value "5"]) x 0.004 seconds = 0.100 seconds. For example, the start demo time in the low-accuracy, low-base state for the symbol with symbol division number "6" is [initial value 0.100 seconds] + ([symbol division number "6"] - [offset value "5"]) x 0.004 seconds = 0.104 seconds. In this way, individual start demonstration times are assigned such that the start demonstration times become longer in 0.004 second increments from symbol classification numbers "5" to "61".

In this embodiment, only the start demonstration time in the low-probability low-base state is different for symbol classification numbers "5" to "61", but in a modified example, the game states other than the low-probability low-base state are different. (at least one of low-certain high base, high-certain low base, and high-certain high base) may be designed to be different from other classification numbers, or the low-certain low base state, low-certain high base state , high-accuracy-low base, and high-accuracy-high base, the end demonstration time of at least one of them may be designed to be different from other classification numbers. In another modification, by moving the symbol classifications "0" to "4" in FIG. 55 to the end of the table and rearranging them so that the symbol classification "5" becomes the first "0" The process of subtracting the value "5" from the symbol classification number may be omitted. The formula for calculating the start demonstration time in this case is a simpler formula such as [initial value 0.100 seconds] + [symbol division number] x 0.004 seconds.

In yet another modification, the time value of a predetermined period other than the start demo time and end demo time is applied to control that dynamically creates a difference for each symbol category by adding a difference value for each symbol category. It's okay. For example, in addition to the start demo time and end demo time, the interval time between unit games of special games, the time value of the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table after the end of the special game, etc. It may also be applied to control such that the time period is increased by a certain period of time each time a certain period of time occurs. In that case, the symbol classification number may be replaced with a counter value that is incremented based on the number of consecutive jackpots. Thereby, as the jackpots continue, the execution time of the special game and the game time after the end of the special game are extended, so it is possible to suppress excessive supply of balls in a short period of time.

(6) Symbol Classification Table A plurality of symbols belonging to the first symbol type are each assigned a unique symbol number, and are classified into a plurality of symbol classifications based on the difference in the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern. Similarly, a plurality of symbols belonging to the second symbol type are each assigned a unique symbol number, and are classified into a plurality of symbol categories depending on the selection tendency of the variation pattern. Also, different symbol division numbers are assigned to symbols that belong to different symbol divisions, and when multiple symbols are viewed in the order of symbol numbers, consecutive symbols that belong to a common symbol division have the same symbol division number. is assigned. For example, as shown in FIG. 54, symbol numbers "2" to "5" are consecutive symbols corresponding to the same symbol category and are assigned the same symbol category number "1", and symbol numbers "6" to "9" are consecutive symbols corresponding to the same symbol category. These are consecutive symbols that correspond to the same symbol division, and are assigned the same symbol division number “2”.

The second variation pattern determining means 232 has a symbol classification determination table in which the correspondence between symbol numbers and symbol classification numbers is determined. A first numerical value indicating the number of symbols belonging to each symbol classification when the number of symbols belonging to each of a plurality of symbol classifications is arranged in order of symbol classification number, and a second numerical value indicating the presence or absence of consecutive same number of symbols or the number of consecutive symbols. The numerical values and are defined in the symbol classification determination table in the order of the symbol classification numbers. The second variation pattern determining means 232 generates a symbol classification number corresponding to the symbol number by referring to the symbol classification determination table every time a symbol belonging to the first symbol type is selected as a symbol indicating a jackpot.

FIG. 56 schematically shows a symbol classification determination table. In the symbol classification determination table 831 in FIG. 56(a), the above-mentioned symbol number comparison value as the "first value" and the classification number value as the "second value" are determined as a set. There is. The first column 833 shows the data number, the second column 835 shows the symbol number comparison value corresponding to the data number, and the third column 837 shows the number of classifications corresponding to the data number. The symbol number comparison value indicates the number of symbols belonging to a division, and the division number indicates whether or not consecutive divisions having the same number of symbols are continuous or the number of consecutive divisions. For example, a symbol number comparison value of "1" and a division number of "1" are determined for the data number "1", and a symbol number comparison value of "4" and a division number of "2" are determined for the data number "2". , the symbol number comparison value "1" and the number of divisions "59" are determined for the data number "3", and the symbol number comparison value "4" and the division number "1" are determined for the data number "4". , a symbol number comparison value of "2" and a classification number of "1" are determined for the data number "5".

Here, FIG. 56(b) shows a conventional symbol classification determination table. In the symbol classification determination table 851 designed using the conventional method, a symbol number comparison value corresponding to the above-mentioned "first value" is determined, but a value of the classification number corresponding to the "second value" is determined. is not defined, but instead, symbol number comparison values are defined for the number of all categories in the order of the categories. The first column 853 shows the symbol classification number, and the second column 855 shows the symbol number comparison value corresponding to the symbol classification. As shown in the symbol classification determination table 851, when there are 64 symbol classifications from "0" to "63", the number of data also reaches 64 in the conventional table structure. In this regard, when using a table structure like the symbol classification determination table 831 of this embodiment, it is possible to judge all 64 symbol classifications with only 10 pieces of data, even if the symbol number comparison value and the number of classifications are combined. This results in a significant reduction in the amount of data compared to conventional methods.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the process of symbol classification determination. The second variation pattern determining means 232 refers to the symbol classification determination table 831 when determining the symbol classification number from the symbol number and executes the following process. First, the target symbol number is read out (S1150), and the first data number "1" is set (S1152). The symbol number comparison value corresponding to the set data number is subtracted from the symbol number (S1154), and each time the symbol division number is subtracted, the symbol classification number is added by 1 and updated (S1156). However, the initial value of the symbol classification number is "0". If the remaining subtracted value is not 0 (N in S1158) and the same subtraction has not been performed the same number of times as the number of divisions (N in S1160), return to S1154 and apply the same symbol number comparison value to the remaining number. S1154 to S1160 are repeated, such as subtracting from the value. When the same subtraction is performed the same number of times as the number of divisions (Y at S1160), the process returns to S1152, sets the next data number, and repeats the processes from S1154 to S1160. If the remaining value becomes 0 in S1158 (Y in S1158), the symbol division number at that time becomes the symbol division number corresponding to the desired symbol number. For example, in the case of symbol number "25", first subtract the symbol number comparison value "1" of data number "1" by the number of divisions "1" (remaining value = 24, symbol division number = 0), and then the data number The symbol number comparison value "4" for "2" is subtracted by the number of divisions "2" (remaining value = 16, symbol division number = 2), and the symbol number comparison value "1" for data number "3" is subtracted. The remaining value becomes 0 at the 16th time while subtracting the number of divisions "59", and the symbol division number at that time becomes "18", and this value is the symbol division number corresponding to the symbol number "25". is generated as .

(7) Reference to the specific timing table The second variation pattern determining means 232 refers to the normal variation pattern table as the variation pattern table in the specific state period after the end of the special game, and the special variation pattern table that is different from the normal variation pattern table. There are cases where it is referred to. The "special variation pattern table" here is, for example, the special variation pattern table of "repeat", "retake", "KR", "drop", "end", and "drop" shown in FIG. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the specific timing table in FIG. 52 in which a specific timing, which is a timing for referring to a specific special variation pattern table ("repeat" in FIG. 51) during a specific state period, is determined for each stopped symbol. Remember. On the other hand, the timing of referring to the special variation pattern table and the normal variation pattern table of "return", "KR", "rejection", "end", and "dropout" in the specific state period is not particularly defined in the table. The timing of referring to the special variation pattern table for "Retrive", "KR", "Return", "End", and "Dropout" is determined based on the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. The second variation pattern determining means 232 refers to a specific timing table in a specific state period, and if the symbol variation has a specific timing corresponding to a stopped symbol, a special variation pattern is created based on the special variation pattern table of "repeat". Select , and if it is the timing of "Retrive", "KR", "Redrop", "End", or "Exit" based on the number of symbol fluctuations as a specific state period, a special fluctuation pattern will be created based on the corresponding special fluctuation pattern table. If the pattern changes at a timing other than these, a normal fluctuation pattern is selected based on the normal fluctuation pattern table. As a result, there is no need to specify which fluctuation pattern table to refer to for all symbol fluctuations included in a specific state period, such as the fluctuation pattern reference table 841 in FIG. 52(b), and the specific timing shown in FIG. 52(a) As shown in table 821, it is only necessary to specify the specific timing at which to refer to the "repeat" special variation pattern table, which is less than the timing at which the normal variation pattern table is referenced. 200 storage capacity can be avoided.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern determination process during the specific state period. During the specific state period, the second variation pattern determining means 232 reads the current number of symbol variations (S1180), refers to the specific timing table (S1182), and if the current number of symbol variations corresponds to the specific timing (S1184). (Y), refers to the "repeat" special variation pattern table (S1185), and skips S1186 to S1196. If it does not correspond to the specific timing (N in S1184), but it is one time before the end timing of the specific state period (Y in S1186), and if it is in a high certainty state (Y in S1187), the special "revenge" Refer to the variation pattern table (S1188) and skip S1189 to S1196. If the probability is low in S1187 (N in S1187), the special fluctuation pattern table for "re-drop" is referred to (S1189), and S1190 to S1196 are skipped. If it is not one time before the end timing of the specific state period (N in S1186), but is at the end timing (Y in S1190), or if it is in a high certainty state (Y in S1191), the special fluctuation pattern table of "KR" is used. (S1192), and skips S1193 to S1196. If the probability is low in S1191 (N in S1191), refer to the "end" special variation pattern table (S1193) and skip S1196. If it is not the end timing of the specific state period in S1190 (N in S1190), the normal fluctuation pattern table is referred to (S1196). Finally, a variation pattern is determined based on each variation pattern table (S1198). In addition, in the case of a low probability state, after the end of the specific state period of this figure, the special variation pattern table of "missing" is referred to for four symbol variations.

In this embodiment, an example has been described in which one type of table is defined as the special variation effect pattern table of "repeat". In a modified example, special variation effect pattern tables for multiple types of "relays" such as "relays 1" and "relays 2" may be prepared, and each reference timing may be specified in a specific timing table. good.

(8) Specific processing for each symbol type As a specific process executed in response to the selection of a symbol indicating a jackpot, the selection result of a symbol indicating a jackpot is referred to, and the selection result is a symbol belonging to the first symbol type. If there is, the first specifying process is executed, and if the selection result is a symbol belonging to the second symbol type, the second specifying process is executed. The manner in which the data table is referenced differs between when the first specific process is executed by the specific game control means 270 and when the second specific process is executed as the specific process.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the process of identifying each symbol type. First, refer to the symbol number of the determined stop symbol (S1200), refer to the symbol determination table 850 in FIG. 54 (S1202), and if the symbol corresponds to the first symbol type (Y in S1204), (S1206), and if it does not correspond to the first symbol type (N in S1204), the first specific process is skipped and the second specific process is executed. Here, the "first specific process" is a unique process that is executed when the stopped symbol belongs to the first symbol type (symbol numbers "12" to "68" in the symbol determination table 850 in FIG. 54). , for example, the symbol classification determination process shown in FIG. 57, the process of generating a start demo time for each symbol classification according to the demonstration time list 860 shown in FIG. 55, and the process of determining specific timing shown in FIGS. 52(a) and 53. This is dedicated processing to avoid an increase in the amount of data. The "second specific process" is a normal process when the stopped symbol is not a symbol belonging to the first symbol type. In other words, unlike the first specifying process in the case of the first symbol type, there is no particular need to avoid an increase in the amount of data. processing is adopted.

The first specifying process and the second specifying process differ in the way the data table is referenced, that is, the presence or absence of reference and the structure of the referenced data table. For example, when the first specifying process is to generate the start demo time for each symbol category for the first symbol type, the symbol category number is calculated without referring to the data table. , as the second specifying process, the second symbol type (symbol numbers "0" to "11", "69" to "74", that is, symbol classification numbers "0" to "4", "62", "63") ), the determination table is referred to when the process of determining the start demo time and end demo time for each symbol category is executed. In this judgment table, the correspondence between symbol classification numbers and demonstration times is defined only in the portions corresponding to symbol classification numbers "0" to "4", "62", and "63" in the demonstration time list 860 of FIG. It's a table. Further, for example, when the symbol classification determination process shown in FIG. 57 is executed as the first specifying process, the data table referred to is the symbol classification determination table 831 shown in FIG. 56(a), whereas the second When the symbol classification determination process is executed for the second symbol type as the specific process, the number of data to be specified does not increase (the second symbol type is determined by symbol numbers "0" to "11", "69", etc.). ” to “74”, that is, symbol classification numbers “0” to “4”, “62”, and “63”), not in a table format as shown in FIG. 56(a), but as shown in FIG. 56(b). A conventional normal format table in which data is specified one-to-one for each symbol or symbol category (however, the number of data is not as large as in FIG. 56(b)) is used by this method. . Further, for example, the data table that is referred to when the process of determining the reference timing of a specific special variation effect pattern table for the first symbol type is executed as the first specifying process is shown in FIG. 52(a). In contrast to the specific timing table 821, the data table that is referred to when the process of determining the reference timing of the special variation effect pattern table for the second symbol type is executed as the second specific process is the specified data table. As long as the number of data to be processed does not become large, instead of using the format shown in FIG. 52(a), use the conventional normal format table (see FIG. 52(b) that specifies the timing at which the special variation effect pattern table is referred to). However, the number of data is not as large as in FIG. 52(b)).

(9) Battle continuous performance The performance determining means 303 includes a first performance element that indicates the number of display elements of a predetermined display element that has a different expectation of winning depending on the number of display elements, and a predetermined display that has a different expectation of winning depending on the type. A plurality of types of specific performance patterns in which combinations of a second performance element indicating the type of the element and a third performance element indicating the display timing of a predetermined display element whose winning expectation differs depending on the display timing are determined. Either of these can be selected as the performance content. Here, the "first performance element" is, for example, the number of displayed ally characters to appear in the performance. The "second production element" includes, for example, the type of ally character or combination thereof to be displayed as the "first production element", the type of opponent character to be displayed as an opponent in the battle production, and the combination of the ally character and the opponent character. At least one of the following. The "third performance element" is, for example, the display timing within the performance of an ally character to be displayed as the "first performance element" or the timing at which the performance is developed. The "specific performance pattern" is, for example, a battle performance that displays the process of a battle between an ally character displayed as a "first performance element" and an opponent character displayed as an opponent. In this embodiment, as a "specific performance pattern", a performance pattern of a battle continuous performance configured such that the timing of winning/losing display is set to one of four stages of performance will be described. Note that the first performance element may include not only the number of ally characters displayed, but also the number of pseudo-continuations in a so-called pseudo-continuous variation performance, the number of so-called stock displays, a number (percentage) indicating the degree of jackpot expectation, etc. . All or part of the first to third performance elements may be the same display element, or may be all different display elements. The first to third performance elements may be not only performance elements for a continuous battle performance that is performed within one symbol change, but also for a continuous battle performance that is performed by looking ahead across multiple symbol changes. .

In the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element, even if the second performance element is a combination that shows a type of relatively hit and low expectation, the first performance element is relatively When the display number indicates a high expectation of a win, the overall expectation of a win may be higher than other combinations in which the second performance element indicates a type with a relatively high expectation of a win. In the combination of the first performance element, the second performance element, and the third performance element, if the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element is a combination with a relatively low expectation level; Also, if the third performance element in that combination shows a display timing with a high expectation of winning relatively, then the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element shows a display timing with a high expectation of winning relatively. There are cases where the overall winning expectation is higher than the combination.

FIG. 60 schematically shows a specific performance selection table in which the correspondence between the combinations of the first to third performance elements and the jackpot expectation level is determined. In the continuous performance selection table 870, combinations of first to third performance elements are mainly determined for each opponent character. The first column 872 shows four types of opponent characters "A" to "D", the second column 874 shows set numbers of 40 sets in total, 10 sets for each opponent character, and the third column 876 shows the jackpot expectation level for each set. The fourth column 878 shows the type of set, and this type is one of the second performance elements. The fifth column 880 shows the combination of ally characters and the timing of each ally character's participation in the battle. In particular, the second ally character appears as the "main character" and becomes the center of the production. The sixth column 882 shows the winning/losing timing for each set. The number of ally characters for each set is the first performance element. In addition, the type of set is determined by which type of ally character is included in each set, especially the type of the second ally character who appears as the "main character", so it is one of the second production elements. Become. Furthermore, since the participation timing of a specific ally character influences the winning/losing timing, the participating timing of the last ally character appearing and the winning/losing timing for each set become the third performance element. The jackpot expectation level varies depending on the combination of these first to third performance elements, and the performance determining means 303 determines whether or not the lottery value falls within the respective lottery value range defined based on the jackpot expectation level to determine whether the battle is continuous or not. Select the production pattern for the production.

Ten sets of sets "A1" to "A10" are defined for the opponent character "A", ten sets of sets "B1" to "B10" are defined for the opponent character "B", and ten sets of sets "B1" to "B10" are defined for the opponent character "C". Ten sets "C1" to "C10" are defined for the opponent character "D", and ten sets "D1" to "D10" are defined for the opponent character "D". These 40 sets are composed of combinations of two to four characters selected from seven types of ally characters "a" to "g". However, each set always includes "a" as the first ally character, and from the second onwards, any two or three ally characters "b" to "g" are added and combined in any order. A set is constructed depending on the In particular, the type of set is determined by the type of ally character added as the second ``main character'', which influences the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the type of ally character that is compatible with each type of opponent character is different; for opponent character "A", ally character "c" is used, for opponent character "B", ally character "e", and opponent character " The ally character "b" is most compatible with "C", and the ally character "d" is most compatible with the opponent character "D". The ally character "f" has relatively good compatibility with any opponent character. A set in which the second ally character that is most compatible with each opponent character is of the type ``Excellent compatibility'', and a set in which the second ally character ``f'', which is relatively compatible with each other, is ``Special compatibility excellent''. ” type, and other sets are “normal” types. Note that the ally character "f" is not limited to the example in which it can be displayed in correspondence with all of the opponent characters "A" to "D", but can only be displayed in correspondence with some of the opponent characters "A" to "D". Alternatively, a plurality of types of ``excellent special compatibility'' may be provided in addition to the ally character ``f'', and each type may be made to correspond to the same or different opponent characters.

The table reference table 820 shows that although the combination of allied characters differs depending on the type of opponent character, the relationship with the winning/losing timing for each combination and the method of setting each jackpot expectation are the same for any opponent character. Illustrated. Therefore, in the following, the case of the opponent character "A" will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the cases of the opponent characters "B" to "D" will be omitted.

The greater the number of ally characters included in the set, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. For example, even in the same "normal" set, the expected jackpot for set "A1", which is a combination of two people, is 30%, and the expected jackpot for sets "A2" and "A3", which are combinations of three people, is 40-50%. %, and the expected jackpot for sets "A4" and "A5", which are combinations of four people, is even higher at 50-60%. Basically, the smaller the number of players, the earlier the last ally characters added will join the battle and the faster the winning timing will be. Furthermore, the larger the number of players, the later the last ally character added to participate in the battle, and the later the timing of winning and losing. However, if a set includes an ally character that is compatible with the opponent character, the expectation of a jackpot is higher even if the number of players is the same, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than a set with a small number of players. For example, the set "A6" (jackpot expectation level 50%) includes the ally character "f" who is relatively compatible with the opponent character "A", so the set "A1" (jackpot expectation level) with the same number of people (2 people) 30%) have a higher expectation of hitting the jackpot. Similarly, the sets "A7" to "A10" (jackpot expectation 60 to 90%) include the ally character "c" who is most compatible with the opponent character "A", so the sets "A7" to "A10" with the same number of people (3 people) The jackpot expectation is higher than A2 and A3 (jackpot expectation 40-50%), and the number of people is larger (4 people). Expectations may be high (sets "A8" to "A10").

The later the winning/losing timing is, the higher the expectation of a jackpot tends to be, and even in sets made up of the same combination of ally characters, a set with a later winning/losing timing has a higher jackpot expectation than a set with an earlier winning/losing timing. For example, sets "A2" and "A3" have the same combination of allied characters, but the set "A3" with a late winning timing (50% jackpot expectation) is different from the set "A2" with an early winning timing (with a jackpot expectation of 50%). 40%), the expectation of jackpot is higher. For example, the sets "A4" and "A5" have the same combination of allied characters, but the set "A5" (with a jackpot expectation of 60%) with a slow winning timing is different from the set "A4" with an early winning timing (with a jackpot expectation of 60%). 50%), the expectation of jackpot is higher. For example, sets "A7" and "A8" have the same combination of allied characters, but the set "A8" (70% jackpot expectation), which has a late winning timing, is different from the set "A7" (jackpot expectation), which has an early winning timing. 60%), the expectation of jackpot is higher. For example, sets "A9" and "A10" have the same combination of allied characters, but the set "A10" with a late winning timing (90% jackpot expectation) is different from the set "A9" with an early winning timing (with a jackpot expectation of 90%). 80%), the expectation of jackpot is higher.

As described above, various sets are constructed by combining the first to third performance elements, and performances with various jackpot expectations can be selected. As a general rule, the higher the number of ally characters displayed as the first production element, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, and the higher the second production element, the more ally characters that are compatible with the opponent character are included, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. As a third performance element, the later the timing of the last ally character's participation in the battle or the timing of winning or losing, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. However, depending on how the first to third performance elements are combined, there are exceptions in which the relationship between the performance elements and the jackpot expectation level is partially reversed as described above. For example, even if a set ("A5") does not include ally characters that are compatible with the opponent character, due to the large number of members (4 people), a set that includes ally characters that are compatible with the opponent character ("A5"). There are cases where the expectation level of jackpot is higher than that of A6. For example, even if the set ("A5") does not include an ally character that is compatible with the opponent character, the winning timing is late ("Continuous Effect 3"), so the ally character that is compatible with the opponent character is The expected jackpot may be higher than the included set (“A6”). For example, even if the set has a relatively small number of members ("A6"), it is more likely to win a jackpot than a set with a relatively large number of members ("A2") because it includes ally characters that are compatible with the opponent character. It may be severe. In this way, by changing the jackpot expectation level by combining multiple expectation-suggesting performances that do not uniquely determine the jackpot expectation level, the player's attention is drawn to the reach performance until the win or loss is displayed, and the expectations for the reach performance are increased. can be maintained.

Even if the set includes ally characters with the same "excellent compatibility," the later the ally character's entry timing is ("A9", "A10"), the earlier the entry timing is ("A7", "A8"). ), the expectation of jackpot is higher. However, as a modified example, even if the set includes allied characters with the same "excellent compatibility," the set in which the allied character joins the battle earlier is more likely to win the jackpot than the set in which the allied character joins the battle later. Good too. The example of the continuous performance selection table 870 is the same except that the types of ally characters that are "excellent compatibility" for the opponent characters "A" to "D" are different, and the types included in the combinations of ally characters are different. The jackpot expectation level is set as follows. In a modified example, the overall jackpot expectation level may be designed to be distributed differently depending on the type of opponent character, and thereby the jackpot expectation level of each of the opponent characters "A" to "D" may be different. good. Also, no matter what combination of the first to third production elements are used, the predetermined preview production (reach with decorative pattern "7", premiere preview, etc.) is executed before the first person participates. The jackpot expectation level for this case may be higher than the jackpot expectation level "90%" for "A10" in FIG. 60. Further, among the first to third performance elements, there may be one that alone gives the expected jackpot of 100% (probability), or one that gives the expected jackpot of 100% (probable) when combined. For example, if ally character "h" participates in the battle at any timing, it will be a success, or if the order of ally characters to participate in the battle changes due to a rule break and the production starts from ally character "b". There may be cases where it is made to be accurate.

FIG. 61 schematically shows the process of continuous battle production. The continuous battle performance is mainly divided into four stages. The first stage 900 is called "main notice," the second stage 902 is called "continuous performance 1," the third stage 904 is called "continuous performance 2," and the fourth stage 906 is called "continuous performance 3." In column 6 882, the winning/losing timing is determined for each set.

A continuous battle performance is started as a symbol variation performance (S1300), and the first ally character (always character "a") participates in the preview performance (S1302). Here, if a set that includes an ally character with "excellent special compatibility" (set "A6") is selected, the second ally character (character "f") will participate in the battle (S1304), and the second ally character (character "f") will be selected. '' character has participated in the battle (S1305), enters the super reach with ``excellent compatibility'' (S1306), and displays the winning or losing results (S1307). In this way, the set "A6" becomes a performance pattern in which the game enters the super reach at the earliest first stage 900 (main preview) and displays the win/loss. If a set that does not include an ally character with "excellent special compatibility" is selected, a normal reach starts to be displayed (S1308), and the process moves to the next second stage 902 (continuous performance 1).

When the first consecutive performance is started (S1310), and a set (set "A7") that includes an ally character with "excellent compatibility" and whose winning timing is "continuous performance 1" is selected (set "A7"), the second ally character (Character "c") participates in the battle (S1312), it is announced that a character with "excellent compatibility" has participated in the battle (S1313), it enters the super reach of "excellent compatibility" (S1314), and the result of winning or losing is displayed. (S1315). In this way, the set "A7" enters the super reach at the second earliest stage 902 (continuous performance 1), and becomes a performance pattern in which winnings and losses are displayed. If a set (Set "A1") that does not include an ally character with "special compatibility" or "excellent compatibility" and has two members is selected, a failure to transition to the next stage is displayed (S1316). , the performance ends with an out-of-order display. In addition, if a set with three or more members is selected, a successful transition to the next stage is displayed (S1317), a second ally character participates in the battle (S1318), and the next third stage 904 is displayed. Transition to (continuous performance 2).

When the second continuous performance is started (S1320), the opponent character appears (S1322). In the case of a set that does not include an ally character with "excellent compatibility", the player may be defeated in battle by the opponent character at this point, and the performance may end with a loss display (S1324) (Set "A2"). On the other hand, if a set (sets "A8" and "A9") that includes an ally character (character "c") with "excellent compatibility" and whose winning/losing timing is "continuous performance 2" is selected (sets "A8" and "A9"), Branches depending on the timing of ally characters' participation in the battle. In other words, if the ally character with "excellent compatibility" participates in the battle at the "second" set (set "A8"), that ally character has entered the battle in S1318, and the character with "excellent compatibility" has joined the battle. (S1326), enters the super reach of "excellent compatibility" (S1332), and displays the winning/losing result (S1334). On the other hand, if the ally character with "excellent compatibility" joins the battle at the "3rd character" set (set "A9"), the third ally character (character "c") will join the battle (S1328), It is announced that a character with "excellent compatibility" has participated in the battle (S1330), enters the super reach of "excellent compatibility" (S1332), and displays the result of winning or losing (S1334).

If a set is selected that does not include an ally character with "excellent compatibility" and has three or more members and whose winning/losing timing is "continuous performance 2", a third ally character participates in the battle (S1328). At this point, there is a difference depending on whether the number of members is 4 or 3. In the case of a set consisting of four members, the fourth ally character (character "g") participates in the battle (S1336), enters a special super reach (S1338), and displays the result of winning or losing (S1340). In the case of a set consisting of three players, the game enters a normal super reach (S1344) and displays the results of wins and losses (S1346). If a set (sets "A3", "A5", "A10") whose win/loss timing is "Continuous Effect 3" is selected, a third ally character appears (S1342), and the next fourth stage 906 (Continuous Effect 3) is selected. Move to performance 3). In this way, the sets "A2", "A4", "A8", and "A9" become performance patterns that display wins and losses in the third stage 904 (continuous performance 2).

When the third consecutive performance is started (S1350), the third ally character that appeared in S1342 participates in the battle (S1352). If the third ally character is "excellent compatibility", it is announced that the "excellent compatibility" character has participated in the battle (S1354), the character enters the "excellent compatibility" super reach (S1356), and the result of winning or losing is announced. Display (S1358). When the number of members is four, the fourth ally character (character "g") participates in the battle (S1360), enters a special super reach (S1362), and displays the winning or losing results (S1364). If the set does not include an ally character with "excellent compatibility" or a fourth ally character (set "A3"), a normal super reach is entered (S1366), and the result of winning or losing is displayed (S1368). In this way, the sets "A3", "A5", and "A10" enter the super reach at the final fourth stage 906 (continuous performance 3), and become a performance pattern in which winnings and losses are displayed. In addition, in any of the win/loss displays shown in FIG. 61 (S1307, S1315, S1316, S1324, S1334, S1340, S1346, S1358, S1364, S1368), a false win (false win) is displayed and then restored. A revival jackpot effect may be executed in which a jackpot is announced.

The present invention has been described above based on examples. Those skilled in the art will understand that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to the combinations of these components and processing processes, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.

Note that the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
In the first game state where the ball entry is easy, if the result of the winning/failure judgment by the first winning/failure judging means or the second winning/failure judging means is a jackpot, the start of symbol fluctuation related to the result of the winning/failure judgment is started. As an opportunity, the easy-to-enter state is ended,
In a second game state that is an easy-to-enter state and is a state different from the first game state, when the result of the win/fail determination by the first win/fail determining means or the second win/fail determining means is a jackpot; , a pinball game machine characterized in that an easy-to-enter state is terminated upon completion of symbol variation related to a result of a hit/fail judgment.
[Item 2]
The first gaming state is a probability fluctuation state and an easy ball entry state,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second game state is a normal probability state and an easy-to-enter state.
[Item 3]
In the first gaming state, a specific performance can be executed only when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the second validity determination means is a jackpot; execute an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the special game corresponding to is a special game that involves a transition to a probability fluctuating state;
Item 1 or 2 is characterized in that in the second gaming state, the specific performance can be executed even when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means is a jackpot. The pinball game machine described.
[Item 4]
In any one of items 1 to 3, in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. The pinball game machine described.
[Item 5]
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by a jackpot as a result of the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means in the probability fluctuation state, the first special symbol is changed out. determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol so that the time becomes relatively long;
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by a jackpot being determined by the first winning/failure determining means or the second winning/failure determining means in the normal gaming state and the normal ball entry state, the first 5. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the variation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 6]
In the case where the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long in the first gaming state, the number of the first reserved symbols reaches a predetermined number or more. 6. The pinball game machine according to item 4 or 5, characterized in that:
[Item 7]
The display control means, when displaying one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner, waits for the other variable display, and when the timing for starting variation of the first special symbol comes, The pinball game machine according to any one of items 4 to 6, characterized in that even if a lottery value is held as a second hold, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with priority.
[Item 8]
The display control means causes the first special symbol to be variably displayed even when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed even when the first special symbol is fluctuating;
In the first gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the off variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reserved symbols is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized by:
[Item 9]
The display control means, when displaying one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner, waits for the variable display of the other, and when the timing for starting variation of the second special symbol comes, Even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority,
In the first gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the off variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reserved symbols is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized by:

[Second aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
When the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means is a jackpot, the first symbol is stopped and displayed. After the execution of the special game executed in is completed, the game state shifts to the first game state which is the easy ball entry state with the end condition of the easy ball entry state as the first condition,
When the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the second validity determination means is a jackpot is a second symbol that is a different type from the first symbol. , after the execution of the special game that is executed by the second symbol being stopped and displayed, a second ball entry easy state in which the end condition of the ball entry easy state is set to a second condition different from the first condition. A pinball game machine characterized in that the game state shifts to the second game state.
[Item 2]
The first condition is the start of symbol variation related to the result of the validity determination when the result of the validity determination is a jackpot,
The pinball gaming machine according to item 1, wherein the second condition is an end of symbol variation related to the result of the success/failure determination when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot.
[Item 3]
The first condition is that the number of symbol changes after transitioning to the easy entry state reaches a predetermined number,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second condition is a case where the result of the judgment is a small hit.
[Item 4]
The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the first game state and the second game state are the same game state, and both are a probability fluctuation state and a ball entry easy state. .
[Item 5]
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are different gaming states,
The first gaming state is a probability fluctuation state and an easy ball entry state,
4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the second game state is a normal probability state and an easy-to-enter state.
[Item 6]
In any one of items 1 to 5, in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. The pinball game machine described.
[Item 7]
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by a jackpot as a result of the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means in the probability fluctuation state, the first special symbol loses and changes. determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol so that the time becomes relatively long;
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by a jackpot being determined by the first winning/failure determining means or the second winning/failure determining means in the normal gaming state and the normal ball entry state, the first The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized in that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 8]
In the case where the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long in the first gaming state, the number of the first reserved symbols reaches a predetermined number or more. 8. The pinball game machine according to item 6 or 7, characterized in that:
[Item 9]
The display control means, when displaying one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner, waits for the variable display of the other, and when the timing for starting variation of the first special symbol comes, The pinball game machine according to any one of items 6 to 8, characterized in that even if a lottery value is held as a second hold, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with priority.
[Item 10]
The display control means causes the first special symbol to be variably displayed even when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed even when the first special symbol is fluctuating;
In the first gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the off variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reserved symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized by:
[Item 11]
The display control means, when displaying one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner, waits for the variable display of the other, and when the timing for starting variation of the second special symbol comes, Even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority,
In the first gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the off variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reserved symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized by:

[Third aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
In the first situation, which is a normal ball entry state, when the ball enters the second starting port, a warning is outputted by a predetermined output means to the player to urge the player to hit the ball aiming at the first starting port. On the other hand, in a second situation that is different from the first situation where the ball enters normally, even if the ball enters the second starting port, the player is not allowed to enter the first starting port. A pinball game machine characterized in that a predetermined output means does not output a warning to encourage hitting a ball aimed at the mouth.
[Item 2]
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein if a ball enters the second starting port while outputting the warning, outputting the warning over the predetermined period of time is restarted.
[Item 3]
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
Furthermore,
3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein if the second suspension reaches an upper limit while outputting the warning, the warning is switched from a normal output state to an output limited state.
[Item 4]
Items 1 to 3 characterized in that, while the warning is being output, if a ball enters the first starting port or if a situation arises in which the ball should enter the second starting port, the warning is terminated. A pinball game machine according to any of the above.
[Item 5]
Until a predetermined period elapses after the situation changes from the situation where the ball should enter the second starting port to the situation where the ball should enter the first starting port, even if the ball is in the normal probability state and the normal entering state, 5. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, characterized in that output of a warning is limited.
[Item 6]
The pinball game machine according to item 5, wherein the restriction is canceled if a predetermined number or more of balls enter the second starting port while the output of the warning is restricted.
[Item 7]
The pinball game machine according to item 5 or 6, characterized in that even while the output of the warning is limited, the display for guiding the player to hit the ball aimed at the first starting port is not limited. .
[Item 8]
In the easy ball entry state, or in the probability variable state and normal ball entry state, the player is prompted to hit the ball aiming at the second starting port for at least a predetermined period of time, triggered by the ball entering the first starting port. If a ball enters the second starting port or the ball enters the first starting port while the warning is being output, the warning being output ends. 8. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 7, characterized in that:

[Fourth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The types of special games include a first special game in which the profit given to the player during the execution of the special game is relatively large, and a first special game in which the profit given to the player during the execution of the special game is relatively small. There are two special games, and after the first special game ends, the probability fluctuates state and the ball entry easy state occurs, and after the second special game ends, the probability fluctuates state and the normal ball entry state, or the normal ball entry state. It becomes a probability state and an easy-to-enter state,
A pinball game machine characterized in that a profit given to a player during a probability variation state and a normal ball entry state is larger than a profit given to the player during a probability variation state and a ball entry easy state.
[Item 2]
From the sum of the expected prize ball acquisition value during the period of the first special game and the expected value of prize ball acquisition during the period of probability fluctuation state and easy ball entry state, the expected value of prize ball acquisition during the second special game period. 2. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the sum of the expected value of prize ball acquisition during the period of the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is greater.
[Item 3]
In the symbol variation performance that triggers the execution of the second special game, a performance indicating that the result is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and in the performance at the start of the second special game, the special game ends. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, which executes an effect that indicates whether the probability fluctuation state and normal ball entry state or the normal probability state and easy ball entry state will occur later.

[Fifth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing; and display control means for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even while the first special symbol is changing;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The performance control means is
variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns on the performance display device to visually indicate the result of the validity determination;
In the normal ball entry state, a first decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner without displaying a second decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and a plurality of first alternative symbols that correspond to the first special symbol and are displayed in a smaller area than the first decorative symbol; a simple symbol that corresponds to the first special symbol and simply indicates the result of the validity determination; Display further fluctuations,
In the ball entry easy state, a second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the first decorative pattern, and a plurality of second decorative patterns corresponding to the second special pattern and displayed in a smaller area than the second decorative pattern are displayed. further variably displaying an alternative symbol and a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that simply indicates the result of the validity determination;
A simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol whose variation is stopped is displayed in a stopped state in an easy entry state after a special game related to a jackpot of a first special symbol that occurs in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state. In this case, a stop symbol indicating a miss is displayed as the simple symbol,
In the initial variable display of the first special symbol when transitioning from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state, the plurality of first decorative symbols and the plurality of first alternative symbols display the variable display from a symbol combination indicating a miss. A pinball game machine characterized by:
[Item 2]
The alternative pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a complementary manner in addition to the display of the decorative pattern to ensure that the pattern is always displayed somewhere on the screen of the effect display device. ,
The simple symbol is a symbol for suggesting whether or not at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and for indicating the result of the validity determination. The pinball game machine according to item 1.
[Item 3]
In the normal probability state and normal ball entry state, in the variable display of the second special symbol, the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is hidden after a predetermined first time from the start of variation, and the second special symbol is While the simple symbol is de-displayed and placed in the display state a predetermined second time before the scheduled timing of the fluctuation stop of the symbol, the first time when transitioning from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state, or The bullet according to item 1 or 2, characterized in that the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not hidden in the first variable display of the second special symbol after the power of the pinball game machine is turned on. Ball game machine.

[Sixth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing; and display control means for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even while the first special symbol is changing;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
a movable accessory that can be operated in front of the production display device;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The performance control means is
variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns on the performance display device to visually indicate the result of the validity determination;
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed without displaying the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to the decorative pattern. further variably displaying a plurality of alternative symbols displayed in an area smaller than the decorative symbol and a simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol that simply indicates the result of the validity determination;
At least in the ball entry easy state, the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed without displaying the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to the decorative pattern. further variably displaying a plurality of alternative symbols displayed in a small area and a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that simply indicates the result of the validity determination;
The operation completion position of the movable accessory is a position that can overlap with a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol,
At least in the normal ball entry state, the movable accessory does not move for a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period from a first predetermined time period before the scheduled stop timing of the second special symbol. A pinball game machine characterized by:
[Item 2]
Further comprising a production accessory that can be displayed in a production manner by emitting light on the screen of the production display device,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein light emission of the performance accessory corresponding to the first special symbol is restricted for at least a predetermined period of time from when the second special symbol stops changing.

[Seventh aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The types of special games include at least a first special game and a second special game, and while the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state do not occur after the end of the first special game, the second special game After the end, it will be in a probability fluctuation state and a normal ball entry state,
The profit granted to the player during the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is greater than the profit given to the player during the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state,
In a situation where the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state are scheduled to occur after the end of the second special game, the specific performance executed in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state may be executed during the execution of the second special game. On the other hand, in a situation where a game state other than a probability fluctuation state and an easy entry state is scheduled to occur after the end of the first special game, the specific performance is not performed during the execution of the first special game. A pinball game machine characterized by:
[Item 2]
When the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state occur after the end of the second special game, the performance executed during the period of the special game continues even in the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state after the end of the special game. The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that:
[Item 3]
the first validity determining means, the second validity determining means, the first pattern determining means, the second pattern determining means, the special game control means, the small winning game control means, the ball landing state setting means, and the The probability state setting means is provided in the main control section that controls the operation of the game,
The performance determining means is provided in a sub-control unit that controls performance operations of the game,
When the performance determining means executes the performance executed in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state during the period of the special game related to the second jackpot, the performance determining means is executed when the big winning opening in the small winning game is opened. A pseudo-small win opening performance that imitates a performance is executed based on a command to open the big winning opening generated by the main control unit, and simulates a performance that is executed when the big winning opening is closed in a small winning game. A pseudo small win closing performance is executed based on a closing command of the big winning opening generated by the main control unit, and after the pseudo small winning closing performance ends, the number of prize balls acquired in the small winning game is displayed. The sub-control unit performs a pseudo small hit end performance that imitates the end effect, a pseudo small hit fluctuation effect that imitates symbol fluctuations related to the small win, and a pseudo small hit start effect that imitates the start demonstration performance of the small win game. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, characterized in that the game is executed based on a generated command.
[Item 4]
If the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state do not occur after the end of the second special game, the time for the end effect of the special game is made relatively long, and the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state occur after the end of the second special game. 4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that when a ball enters the state, the time for ending the special game is relatively shortened.

[Eighth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
As the performance contents that can be executed within the period in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed one time, there is a first preview performance, and a second preview performance that has a higher expectation for transition to a special game than the first preview performance. It has at least a performance,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that makes it appear as if the predetermined performance content has been temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing within a period in which one variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed,
While the first preview performance and the second preview performance are not executed during the execution of the specific performance, the first preview performance or the second preview performance can be executed after the execution of the specific performance,
The predetermined timing has at least a first timing and a second timing that is a timing after the first timing, and when the specific performance is executed at the first timing, the second preview performance Although the probability of occurrence of is low, the possibility of occurrence of the first preview performance is high. On the other hand, when the specific performance is executed at the second timing, the possibility of the occurrence of the first preview performance is low. The pinball game machine is characterized in that the pinball game machine is configured such that the second preview effect is more likely to occur.
[Item 2]
A first preview performance or a second preview performance is generated after execution of a specific performance that temporarily stops the performance at a predetermined timing in one variable performance period, and in the case of the first preview performance, the predetermined effect is generated after the variable performance is re-executed. After executing a specific performance that pauses the performance again at the timing of , a first preview performance or a second preview performance is generated, thereby performing a performance that makes it appear as if a pseudo symbol change has been executed multiple times. There are cases,
further comprising an operation input means for receiving operation input from a player,
In the specific performance, a predetermined performance is executed, which is a performance that prompts the player to input an operation into the operation input means and generates the first preview performance or the second preview performance in response to the operation input by the player. There may be cases where
If the time from the start of variation or re-execution of the variable performance to the temporary stop is relatively short, the possibility of generating the first preview performance or the second preview performance after generating the predetermined performance is relatively low. On the other hand, if the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the effect to the temporary stop is relatively long, the predetermined effect is generated and then the first preview effect or the second preview effect is set. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the pinball game machine is set to have a relatively high possibility of causing this.
[Item 3]
Item 2 is set such that when the predetermined effect occurs, the possibility that the second preview effect occurs is higher than the possibility that the first preview effect occurs after the predetermined effect occurs. Pinball game machine.
[Item 4]
A special performance may be executed in which a temporary stop time of the variable performance based on the specific performance exceeds a predetermined time, and the longer the duration of the special performance, the higher the possibility that the second preview performance will occur. The pinball game machine set forth in item 1.
[Item 5]
The pinball game machine according to item 4, wherein the end timing of the special effect is synchronized with the occurrence timing of the specific effect.
[Item 6]
Item 4 or 5, characterized in that when the second preview performance occurs after the execution of the special performance, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when the second preview performance occurs without the special performance being executed. The pinball game machine described.

[Ninth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The variation pattern may be composed of a combination of one of the plurality of types of variation additional patterns added to one of the plurality of types of basic variation patterns,
By referring to the basic fluctuation pattern selection criteria according to the result of the validity determination, one basic fluctuation pattern according to the result of the validity determination is selected,
By referring to the variation addition pattern selection criteria corresponding to the selected one basic variation pattern, one variation addition pattern corresponding to the selected basic variation pattern is selected;
The plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns include at least a first basic fluctuation pattern and a second basic fluctuation pattern, and even if the first basic fluctuation pattern is selected, the second basic fluctuation pattern is selected. Even if the
Whether the first basic variation pattern is selected or the second basic variation pattern is selected, a specific variation addition pattern can be selected, while the first basic variation pattern A bullet ball characterized in that the types of variation addition pattern selection criteria in which the specific variation addition pattern to be referred to is included in the selection candidates are different depending on whether the specific variation addition pattern to be referred to is selected or the second basic variation pattern is selected. Game machine.
[Item 2]
A first preview performance or a second preview performance is generated after execution of a specific performance that temporarily stops the performance at a predetermined timing in one variable performance period, and in the case of the first preview performance, the predetermined effect is generated after the variable performance is re-executed. After executing a specific performance that pauses the performance again at the timing of , a first preview performance or a second preview performance is generated, thereby performing a performance that makes it appear as if a pseudo symbol change has been executed multiple times. There are cases,
If the time from the start of variation or re-execution of the fluctuating performance to the temporary stop is relatively short, the second preview performance is set so that the possibility of occurrence is low but the first preview performance is likely to occur. On the other hand, if the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the performance to the temporary stop is relatively long, the possibility of the first preview performance occurring is low, but the possibility of the second preview performance occurring is high. set,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the variable addition pattern is a pattern that defines the type and timing of the first preview performance.
[Item 3]
3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of types of variation patterns include a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern that have a common variation presentation content and variation time.
[Item 4]
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, if the result of the above judgment corresponds to a small hit, the variation addition time of any one of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns is applied to the basic variation pattern corresponding to the small hit. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that a predetermined additional time is added.
[Item 5]
The bullet ball according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern that can be selected even when the result of the judgment is a jackpot or a loss. Game machine.
[Item 6]
The variation pattern that can be selected is that if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, a predetermined additional time other than the variation addition time is added to the variation time, and if the result of the judgment is a loss, the predetermined addition time is added to the variation time. The pinball game machine according to item 5, wherein the additional time is not added to the variable time.
[Item 7]
Among the plurality of types of variation patterns, only one predetermined type of variation addition pattern is associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the performance that leads to the jackpot after the first preview performance. The bullet ball according to any one of items 1 to 6, characterized in that a plurality of types of variable additional patterns are associated with the variable pattern corresponding to a performance that leads to a jackpot without a hit, as addable variable additional patterns. Game machine.

[Tenth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
In the normal ball entry state, the time from the stop of the variation of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation varies depending on whether the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit or a miss. In the easy entry state, the time from the stop of variation of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation is constant regardless of whether the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit or a miss. A pinball game machine.
[Item 2]
If the first time is set as the first time, the decorative pattern related to the second special pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern mode indicating a small hit, and is stopped and displayed in a pattern mode indicating other than a small hit in the easy entry state. The symbol fixing time to be played is the second time which is the sum of the first time and the time for the small hit game, and the symbol fixing time when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol mode other than the small hit in the normal ball entry state is the second time. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the third time is shorter than the third time.
[Item 3]
The second time is the first time, the fourth time which is the start demonstration time of the small winning game that occurs in the easy entry state, the fifth time which is the end demonstration time of the small winning game, and the small winning game. The pinball game machine according to item 2, wherein the sixth time is the execution time of the winning game.
[Item 3]
The starting demonstration time of the small winning game that occurs in the normal ball entry state is the 7th hour, which is different from the 4th hour, and the ending demonstration time of the small winning game is the 8th hour, which is different from the 5th hour, and the small winning game is at the 7th hour, which is different from the 4th hour. The pinball game machine according to item 3, wherein the execution time of the winning game is the sixth time.

[Eleventh aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing; and display control means for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even while the first special symbol is changing;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
In a predetermined situation in the normal ball entry state, the content of the background display can be changed by at least one of the start of fluctuation and the stop of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. and the content of the background display is configured not to be changed when the fluctuation stops,
Under a predetermined situation in the easy-to-enter state, the content of the background display can be changed by at least one of the start of fluctuation and the stop of fluctuation of the second special symbol; It is configured so that the content of the background display is not changed when the fluctuation starts and the fluctuation stops,
In the final symbol variation during the duration of the easy entry state, the background display may be updated by at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation of the second special symbol, and the variation of the first special symbol. A pinball game machine characterized in that the background display can be updated upon at least one of a start and a stop of fluctuation.
[Item 2]
The first validity determining means, the second validity determining means, the first pattern determining means, the second pattern determining means, the display controlling means, the special game controlling means, and the ball landing state setting means installed in the main control section that controls the operation of
The performance determining means is provided in a sub-control unit that controls performance operations of the game,
When a reset occurs in at least one of the main control unit and the sub-control unit due to a predetermined error, the background display is triggered by at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation of the first special symbol. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the background display can be updated, and the background display can be updated when at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation of the second special symbol is triggered.
[Item 3]
After the continuation period of the easy-to-enter state ends, the game result in the easy-to-enter state will change between the elapse of a certain period of time after the last symbol fluctuation stop fluctuation command in the said duration period and the start of the next fluctuation. 3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein a normal background immediate switching designation command for immediately switching from a special background for displaying to a normal background is transmitted.

[Twelfth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
An operating port that allows game balls to enter;
an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows or facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting port when expanded;
A big prize opening into which a game ball can enter or easily enter when opened;
a first validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the first starting port;
a second validity determination means for executing a validity determination for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, using the entry of the ball into the second starting port as a trigger;
a first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means;
a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
a normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol is variably displayed to indicate that the expanding mechanism is to be expanded upon entry of the ball into the operating port;
a first pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
a second pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion;
display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first suspension control means for holding the lottery values used in the validity determination by the first validity determination means up to a predetermined number as a first suspension until the first validity determination means performs the validity determination; ,
a second hold control means for holding the lottery values used in the judgment by the second judgment means, up to a predetermined number as a second hold until the judgment is made by the second judgment means; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of a big prize opening when the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means or the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot;
When the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit, or when the result of the judgment by at least one of the first judgment means and the second judgment means is a small hit, A small winning game control means for executing a small winning game involving opening of a large winning opening;
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port include a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which ball entry is easier than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. a ball entering state setting means capable of setting a ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; and the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means and the second probability state setting means, which has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
Production control means for controlling production based on the decision made by the production determination means;
Equipped with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state,
It is configured such that the probability that the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means is a small hit, or , the result of the judgment by the first judgment means may not be a small hit, while the result of the judgment by the second judgment means may be a small hit;
The positional relationship is such that when the expansion mechanism is expanded, the ease of entering the ball into the big winning hole is reduced compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability variation state and the ball entry easy state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation pattern whose variation time is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined by
The performance determining means is capable of managing cumulative value information that is information regarding the cumulative value of the number of prize balls to be paid out,
The performance control means is capable of executing a prize ball addition performance that adds and displays the number of prize balls to be paid out while counting up and displaying the number,
If the above cumulative value reaches a specific number while the count-up display in the prize ball addition display is not yet completed and continues to be displayed, the count-up display is not yet completed and continues to be displayed. The pinball game machine is characterized in that the number of prize balls corresponding to the specific number is highlighted on the specific number.
[Item 2]
The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that when a specific performance display occurs during the count-up display, the number of prize balls being counted up is hidden.
[Item 3]
After the number of prize balls being counted up is hidden by the specific effect display, if the display of the number of prize balls is restarted by the end of the specific effect display, the uncompleted count-up will be counted. The pinball game machine according to item 2, wherein the display is resumed in a state where the upload has been completed.

[13th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
Display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. fluctuation pattern determining means for holding a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determining means;
The specific game control means determines the type of stop symbol that triggered the special game as a specific state period in which the gaming state is at least in the specific gaming state and can transition to an advantageous state after the elapse of that period. Accordingly, determine the number of symbol changes within the range up to the predetermined maximum number of continuations,
The performance determining means determines the content of a predetermined special performance as a performance to be performed over the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period,
The production determining means initially creates a number of production suggestion objects corresponding to the maximum number of continuations from the first symbol variation production as the content of the special production, regardless of the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. A pinball game machine characterized in that it can be determined to display and delete a performance suggestion object corresponding to a symbol variation each time a symbol variation is executed.

[Fourteenth aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The specific game control means determines the type of stop symbol that triggered the special game as a specific state period in which the gaming state is at least in the specific gaming state and can transition to an advantageous state after the elapse of that period. Accordingly, determine the number of symbol changes within the range up to the predetermined maximum number of continuations,
The performance determining means determines the content of a predetermined special performance as a performance to be performed over the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period,
The production determining means initially creates a number of production suggestion objects corresponding to the maximum number of continuations from the first symbol variation production as the content of the special production, regardless of the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. display, and each time a symbol variation is executed, it can be determined to delete the production suggestion object corresponding to the symbol variation;
The production determining means selects one of a plurality of types of arrangement patterns as an initial arrangement pattern of the production suggestion object according to a selection criterion having a different selection tendency depending on the stop symbol,
The fluctuation pattern determining means selects a normal fluctuation pattern based on a normal fluctuation pattern selection criterion for symbol fluctuations other than a predetermined specific timing for each stopped symbol in the specific state period, and selects a normal fluctuation pattern for each stopped symbol based on a normal fluctuation pattern selection criterion. Selecting a special fluctuation pattern based on special fluctuation pattern selection criteria different from the normal fluctuation pattern selection criteria for symbol fluctuations at a specific timing predetermined in
The performance determining means refers to one of the performance pattern selection criteria among the plurality of types of performance pattern selection criteria in accordance with different reference standards depending on the stopped symbol, and selects the performance pattern selection criteria based on the referenced performance pattern selection criteria during the specific state period. The bullet ball is characterized in that a production pattern is selected based on the pattern variation production at the specific timing, and a production that notifies the transition to the advantageous state in response to the special variation pattern selected in the symbol variation production at the specific timing. Game machine.

[15th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The specific game control means determines the type of stop symbol that triggered the special game as a specific state period in which the gaming state is at least in the specific gaming state and can transition to an advantageous state after the elapse of that period. Accordingly, determine the number of symbol changes within the range up to the predetermined maximum number of continuations,
The performance determining means determines the content of a predetermined special performance as a performance to be performed over the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period,
The production determining means initially creates a number of production suggestion objects corresponding to the maximum number of continuations from the first symbol variation production as the content of the special production, regardless of the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period. display, and each time a symbol variation is executed, it can be determined to delete the production suggestion object corresponding to the symbol variation;
The performance determining means refers to one of the performance pattern selection criteria among the plurality of types of performance pattern selection criteria in accordance with different reference standards depending on the stopped symbol, and selects the performance pattern selection criteria based on the referenced performance pattern selection criteria during the specific state period. Select a production pattern based on
When the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period is less than the predetermined maximum number of continuations, a part of the plurality of performance suggestion objects displayed in the special performance is deleted to substantially reduce the number of display objects. Accordingly, the end timing of the special performance is suggested in accordance with the end timing of the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period, or the end timing of the special performance is suggested in accordance with the transition timing of the number of symbol fluctuations determined as the specific state period. Suggesting the timing of transition to the advantageous state,
If the number of symbol variations determined as the specific state period is equal to the predetermined maximum number of continuations, the timing of transition to the advantageous state is suggested in accordance with the timing corresponding to the predetermined maximum number of continuations. A pinball game machine.

[16th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that it is possible to move to the special game and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the special game ends is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The specific game control means determines the number of symbol fluctuations as a specific state period during which the gaming state is at least the specific gaming state and can shift to an advantageous state after the elapse of that period;
In the specific state period, a predetermined special performance that suggests the development of the game is executed from the first symbol fluctuation performance to the determined number of symbol fluctuation performances until the symbol fluctuation is executed multiple times. ,
In the special performance, a transition performance that suggests a transition to the advantageous state may be executed in synchronization with the timing when the symbol variation reaches the determined number of symbol variations, and the symbol variation reaches the determined number of symbol variations. If a predetermined condition is satisfied by the time the transition effect is reached, a performance that has at least a part in common with the transition performance is executed, and then the transition to another advantageous state different from the advantageous state is possible. Ball game machine.

[Seventeenth aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The symbol determining means is configured to determine, when the result of the validity determination is a hit, that the symbol belongs to one of a plurality of symbol types including a first symbol type and a second symbol type as a symbol indicating a win. Selecting a symbol as the stopping mode of the symbol,
Each time a symbol belonging to the first symbol type is selected as a symbol indicating a win, the special game control means controls at least one of the start performance time and end performance time of the corresponding special game. A pinball game machine characterized in that calculation is performed based on a predetermined initial value and a symbol number uniquely assigned to each symbol.

[18th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port into which game balls can be inserted;
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The symbol determining means is configured to determine, when the result of the validity determination is a hit, that the symbol belongs to one of a plurality of symbol types including a first symbol type and a second symbol type as a symbol indicating a win. Selecting a symbol as the stopping mode of the symbol,
The plurality of symbols belonging to the first symbol type are each assigned a unique symbol number, and are classified into a plurality of symbol categories based on the difference in the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern,
Different symbol division numbers are assigned to symbols that belong to different symbol divisions, and when multiple symbols are viewed in order of symbol number, the same symbol division number is assigned to consecutive symbols that belong to a common symbol division. has been
The fluctuation pattern determining means has a symbol classification determination table in which a correspondence relationship between the symbol number and the symbol classification number is determined, and the fluctuation pattern determining means has a symbol classification determination table in which a correspondence relationship between the symbol number and the symbol classification number is determined, and also when the number of symbols belonging to each of a plurality of symbol classifications is arranged in the order of the symbol classification number. A first numerical value indicating the number of symbols belonging to each symbol classification, and a second numerical value indicating the presence or absence or number of consecutive symbols of the same number are defined in the symbol classification determination table in the order of the symbol classification numbers. Each time a symbol belonging to the first symbol type is selected as a symbol indicating a hit, the symbol classification number corresponding to the symbol number is generated by referring to the symbol classification determination table. A pinball game machine.

[19th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port into which game balls can be inserted;
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The variation pattern determining means refers to a normal variation pattern selection criterion as the variation pattern selection criterion in a specific state period after the end of the special game, and refers to a special variation pattern selection criterion different from the normal variation pattern selection criterion. There are cases,
The variation pattern determining means stores a specific timing table in which a specific timing, which is a timing for referring to the special variation pattern selection criteria, is determined for each stop symbol during the specific state period;
The variation pattern determining means refers to the specific timing table during the specific state period, and selects a special variation pattern based on the special variation pattern selection criteria if the symbol variation has a specific timing corresponding to the stopped symbol. The pinball game machine is characterized in that, if the symbol fluctuation is at a time other than the specific timing corresponding to the stopped symbol, a normal fluctuation pattern is selected based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection criteria.

[Twentieth aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port into which game balls can be inserted;
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The symbol determining means is configured to determine, when the result of the validity determination is a hit, that the symbol belongs to one of a plurality of symbol types including a first symbol type and a second symbol type as a symbol indicating a win. Selecting a symbol as the stopping mode of the symbol,
As a specific process executed in response to the selection of the symbol indicating a hit, the selection result of the symbol indicating the hit is referred to, and if the selection result is a symbol belonging to the first symbol type, the first If the selection result is a symbol belonging to the second symbol type, the second specific processing is executed, and the first specific processing is executed as the specific processing. A pinball game machine characterized in that the manner in which the data table is referred to is different between when the second specifying process is executed and when the second specifying process is executed.

[21st aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port into which game balls can be inserted;
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
A specific game control means that controls transition to a specific gaming state in which the ease of acquiring new wins in the normal game after the end of the special game is more advantageous than in the normal state;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
The effect determining means includes a first effect element indicating the number of displayed predetermined display elements with different expected winning degrees depending on the number of displayed elements, and a first effect element indicating the type of the predetermined display element with different expected winning degrees depending on the type. The production content is one of a plurality of specific production patterns in which a combination of the second production element and a third production element that indicates the display timing of a predetermined display element whose winning expectation differs depending on the display timing is determined. can be selected as
In the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element, even if the second performance element is a combination that indicates a type with a relatively low probability of winning, the first performance element In the case where the display number indicates a relatively high expectation of winning, the overall expectation of winning may be higher than other combinations in which the second performance element indicates a type with a relatively high expectation of winning,
Among the combinations of the first performance element, the second performance element, and the third performance element, the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element is a combination with a relatively low expectation level. Even in the case of , if the third effect element in the combination shows a display timing with a relatively high expectation, the combination of the first effect element and the second effect element is relatively A pinball game machine characterized in that the overall expectation of winning may be higher than that of other combinations with higher expectations of winning.

Reference Signs List 11 first starting port, 12 second starting port, 51 first special symbol, 52 second special symbol, 60 effect display device, 221 first validity determining means, 222 second validity determining means, 240 hold control means, 260 special Game control means, 265 Small hit game control means, 303 Performance determining means, 510 Ball entering state setting means, 512 Probability state setting means.

Claims (1)

A starting port into which game balls can be inserted;
A propriety determining means for executing a propriety judgment for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting hole;
a display device on which a pattern for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
display control means for variably displaying the symbol on the display device;
symbol determining means for determining a stopping mode of the symbol according to the result of the validity determination;
A variation pattern selection standard in which one of multiple types of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined is selected by lottery, and a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and a lottery value is determined as a selection criterion to be referred to in the selection. a fluctuation pattern determining means that holds a plurality of
a special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the validity judgment indicates that the transition to the special game is possible and the fluctuating display of the symbols stops in a predetermined stopping manner;
an effect display device that displays effect contents according to the result of the validity determination;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying performance content on the performance display device based on the determination by the performance determination means,
As performance elements that suggest the expectation of winning, a first performance element that indicates the number of display elements of a predetermined display element, a second performance element that indicates the type of the predetermined display element, and a display timing of the predetermined display element. It is possible to select any one of a plurality of types of specific performance patterns in which combinations of the third performance element and the like are determined as the performance content,
Among the combinations of the first performance element, the second performance element, and the third performance element, the combination of the first performance element and the second performance element is a combination with a relatively low expectation level. Even in the case of , if the third effect element in the combination shows a display timing with a relatively high expectation, the combination of the first effect element and the second effect element is relatively There are cases where the overall expectation of winning is higher than other combinations with high expectation of winning.
Among the combinations of the first performance element, the second performance element, and the third performance element, the combination of the first performance element and the third performance element is a combination with a relatively low expectation level. Even in the case of , if the second performance element in the combination shows a display timing with a relatively high expectation, the combination of the first performance element and the third performance element is relatively There are cases where the overall expectation of winning is higher than other combinations with high expectation of winning.
Among the plurality of types of specific performance patterns, in a combination of the first performance element and the second performance element, the number of display elements indicated by the first performance element and the number of display elements indicated by the second performance element are determined. A first specific performance pattern and a second specific performance pattern that have the same type of display element may have the same expectation of winning indicated by the combination, while the display element indicated by the first performance element may The expected degree of winning indicated by the combination may differ between the third specific performance pattern and the fourth specific performance pattern, which have the same number of display elements and the type of display element indicated by the second performance element. A pinball game machine featuring:

Images